Test Bank For Your Office Microsoft 365 Excel 2025, 1st Edition By Amy S. Kinser Kristyn Jacobson Er

Test Bank For Your Office Microsoft 365 Excel 2025, 1st edition Amy S. Kinser Kristyn Jacobson Eric Kinser Brant Moriarity Chapter 1-14 With Appendex Chapter 1: Create, Navigate, Work with, and Print Worksheets 1) A application is a computer program with a user interface comprised of a grid of rows and columns.

A) database B) spreadsheet C) matrix D) tabular Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

2) The intersection of a row and column is called a A) container B) chamber C) cubicle D) cell

.

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

3) A is a grid of columns and rows in which data is entered.

A) database B) presentation C) document D) worksheet Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

4) Formulas and functions begin with a(n) A) # B) =

sign.

1 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) @ D) & Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

5) Which of the following is NOT a type of data that can be contained in a cell?

A) Formula B) Function C) Text D) Recording Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

6) The default file extension for Microsoft Excel 365 workbooks is A) .xl x B) .xlls C) .xls D) .xlsx

.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

7) When there are multiple worksheets in a workbook, you can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl + to move one worksheet to the right.

A) Home B) End C) PgDn D) PgUp Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

8) In a worksheet, the keyboard shortcut to move one column to the left is A) Shift + Tab B) Ctrl + Tab 2 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

C) Tab D) Ctrl + Home Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

9) In a worksheet, the keyboard shortcut to move to cell A1 is A) Home B) Shift + Home C) Alt + Home D) Ctrl + Home

.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

10) In a worksheet, to move right one screen you would use the keyboard shortcut .

A) PgDn B) Shift + PgDn C) Ctrl + PgDn D) Alt + PgDn Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

11) In a worksheet, a note is indicated by the presence of a upper-right corner of a cell.

A) red square B) green square C) red triangle D) green triangle

in the

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Document your work

12) Which of the following is NOT an example of worksheet documentation?

A) Automated calculation notes 3 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) Descriptive worksheet names C) Descriptive cell labels D) Descriptive column titles Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Document your work

13) Which of the following is typically NOT contained in a separate documentation worksheet?

A) Modification dates B) Author C) Charts D) Modification history Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Document your work

14) In Microsoft Excel 365, dates are stored as serial numbers starting from which of the following dates?

A) January 1, 1000 B) December 31, 999 C) December 31, 1899 D) January 1, 1900 Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

15) Which of the following data types is NOT automatically right-aligned by Excel?

A) Numeric B) Date C) Text D) Time Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

16) If you enter a date or time that is not recognized, Excel treats the information as 4 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

and left-aligns it in the cell.

A) numeric B) text C) a date D) a time Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

17) If you click A) in a cell B) in the formula bar C) a worksheet tab D) the Home tab

, the insertion point is displayed in the formula bar.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

18) The keyboard shortcut for Undo is A) Ctrl + Y B) Ctrl + W C) Ctrl + U D) Ctrl + Z

.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

19) To insert a line break or hard return in a cell, you would press A) Ctrl + Enter B) Enter C) Alt + Enter D) Shift + Enter Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

20) You can select a noncontiguous range of cells by pressing and holding the 5 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

key when using it in combination with other navigation keys and/or the mouse.

A) F7 B) F5 C) Alt D) Ctrl Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

21) An example of a range of cells is A) A1:A3 B) A1&A3 C) A1+A3 D) A1- A3

.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

22) To select several contiguous columns, click the header of the first column, the header of the last column.

A) then double-click B) then right-click C) press and hold Shift, and click D) press and hold Ctrl, and click Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Adjust columns and rows

23) To select noncontiguous rows, click the header of the first row, header of each additional row.

A) then double-click B) then right-click C) press and hold Shift, and click D) press and hold Ctrl, and click Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Adjust columns and rows 6 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

the

24) In Excel, the height of the rows is measured in A) picas B) points C) precision dots D) ppm

.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Adjust columns and rows

25) To change the width of a column, you click Format and then Column Width in the tab.

A) Cells group on the Format tab B) Adjustment group on the Format tab C) Cells group on the Home tab D) Adjustment group on the Home tab Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Adjust columns and rows

26) To AutoFit the width of a column, you click Format and then click AutoFit Column Width in the tab.

A) Cells group on the View B) Format group on the View C) Cells group on the Home D) Format group on the Home Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Adjust columns and rows

27) If a column is too narrow to display a numerical value in a cell, a series of characters is displayed.

A) & B) @ C) % D) # Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Adjust columns and rows 7 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

28)

worksheet tabs identify inactive worksheets.

A) Green B) Gray C) White D) Blue

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Manipulate worksheets and workbooks

29) You can copy a worksheet within a workbook, by copy of the worksheet to its new location.

A) double-clicking the worksheet tab B) clicking the worksheet tab, pressing and holding Ctrl C) right-clicking the worksheet tab D) clicking the worksheet tab, pressing and holding Shift

, and then dragging a

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Manipulate worksheets and workbooks

30) You can rename a worksheet by then pressing Enter.

A) right-clicking B) double-clicking C) pressing Ctrl and clicking D) clicking

its tab, typing the new name, and

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Manipulate worksheets and workbooks

31) Headers and footers are divided into A) one B) two C) three D) four

section(s).

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Preview, print, and export workbooks 8 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

32) What happens when a worksheet is printed with the default margin settings in Excel?

A) A reasonable amount of white space appears around all edges.

B) No margins appear around the content.

C) The margins must be manually set before printing.

D) The margins vary based on the printer type.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Preview, print, and export workbooks

33) Worksheets can be oriented in which two ways when printing?

A) Portrait and landscape B) Vertical and diagonal C) Horizontal and vertical D) Standard and wide Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Preview, print, and export workbooks

34) The default print range setting in Excel is A) Print Selection B) Print Entire Workbook C) Print Active Print Areas D) Print Active Sheets

.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Preview, print, and export workbooks

35) The file extension PDF stands for A) Portable Data File B) Portable Document Format C) Portable Data Format D) Portable Document File

.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Preview, print, and export workbooks

36) In Excel, a formula is a mathematical expression created by the user to calculate a 9 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

value, while a function is a built-in program used to perform tasks like calculating a sum or average.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

37) When using a what-if analysis, you change values in spreadsheet cells to see the effects on calculated values of interest.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

38) When collecting data in a spreadsheet, each row contains a record.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

39) A workbook is a file containing at least one worksheet.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

40) A function is the same as a user-created formula.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

41) The active worksheet has a white tab with bold letters and a thick bottom border.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

42) In Microsoft Excel 365, workbooks have a file extension of .xlsx.

Answer: TRUE 10 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

43) The Ctrl + S shortcut quickly saves your file to the same location as the last save.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

44) A cell reference is a combination of a row number followed by a column letter, for example 12C. Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

45) Keyboard shortcuts allow rapid navigation in a worksheet without having to use the mouse.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

46) The Ctrl + PgUp keyboard shortcut moves up one screen in an Excel worksheet.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

47) When using touch mode on a touch screen, the Excel 365 commands on the ribbon and in shortcut menus are rearranged to accommodate touch input.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

48) A comment or note is added to an individual cell.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 11 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 3. Document your work

49) The dollar sign ($) and comma (,) are stored as part of a numeric cell value.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

50) In Excel, date and time data are special forms of numeric data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

51) By default, numeric data is right-aligned in a cell.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

52) By default, text data is right-aligned in a cell.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

53) Data formatted as a date takes the form of a serial number, with the number 1 representing January 1, 1900.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

54) A noncontiguous cell range consists of multiple cells where all cells are directly adjacent to each other.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges 12 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

55) A contiguous cell range consists of multiple cells where at least one cell is not directly adjacent to other cells.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

56) A comment is used to temporarily store cut or copied information in Excel.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

57) A destination cell is the location cell to be modified by a move or paste operation.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

58) One of the most efficient ways of moving data from one cell to another is to drag and drop.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

59) White space refers to blank areas of a worksheet that do not contain data or documentation, regardless of the actual color.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Adjust columns and rows

60) Gray worksheet tabs identify inactive worksheets.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Manipulate worksheets and workbooks

61) If you mistakenly delete a worksheet in Excel, you can recover it by using the Undo 13 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

command.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Manipulate worksheets and workbooks

62) The Auto Fill feature in Excel is used to adjust the row height so that all cell contents are visible.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Manipulate worksheets and workbooks

63) Page Break Preview allows you to manually adjust the location of page breaks.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Preview, print, and export workbooks

64) In Excel, the intersection of a row and a column is called a(n) Answer: cell

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

65) When collecting data in a spreadsheet, each type of information (or field) in a record.

Answer: column

represents a specific

Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

66) A(n) Answer: formula

is an equation that produces results such as numbers or text.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

67) A(n) is a built-in program that performs a task such as finding the sum of a series of numbers.

14 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: function Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

68) A(n) worksheet.

Answer: row

is a horizontal set of cells that encompasses all the columns in a

Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

69)

allows you to examine the outcome of the changes to values in a worksheet.

Answer: What-if analysis Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

70) When using Excel, a spreadsheet is also referred to as a(n) Answer: worksheet

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

71) The worksheet that is visible in the Excel application window is the worksheet.

Answer: active Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

72) A file that contains one or more worksheets is a(n) Answer: workbook

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

73) The cell that receives an action, such as a click, calculation, or paste is the cell.

15 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: active Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

74) An example of a cell Answer: reference

is K12.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

75) In , the ribbon and shortcut menus are enlarged to make selecting commands with your fingertip easier.

Answer: touch mode Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Document your work

76) A red triangle in the upper-right corner of a cell indicates the existence of a(n) .

Answer: note Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Document your work

77)

data consists of numbers in any form NOT combined with letters and special characters.

Answer: Numeric Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

78) Answer: Date

data is formatted as a serial number.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

79) By default, Answer: text

data is left-aligned in a cell.

16 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

80) Time data is represented as a(n) Answer: decimal

value.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Enter and edit data

81) A(n) Answer: contiguous

cell range consists of cells directly adjacent to one another.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

82) A(n) cell range consists of multiple selected cells with at least one cell not directly adjacent to other cells.

Answer: noncontiguous Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

83) The cells on a worksheet that have been selected are a cell Answer: range

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

84) Blank areas of a worksheet that do not contain data or documentation are called .

Answer: white space Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Adjust columns and rows

85)

copies information from one cell or a series of cells into contiguous

cells.

Answer: Auto Fill or AutoFill Diff: 2 17 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 7. Manipulate worksheets and workbooks

86) When using Answer: landscape

orientation, the page is wider than it is tall.

Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Preview, print, and export workbooks

87) When using Answer: portrait

orientation, the page is taller than it is wide.

Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Preview, print, and export workbooks

88)

is a file type that preserves most formatting attributes of a source document regardless of the software in which the document was created.

Answer: PDF, Portable Document Format Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Preview, print, and export workbooks

89) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Cell II. Column III. Field IV. Formula V. Function A. Performs a mathematical calculation B. The intersection of a row and a column in a worksheet C. A built-in formula or program D. An item of information in a worksheet column that is associated with something of interest E. A vertical set of cells that encompasses all the rows in a worksheet Answer: B, E, D, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

90) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Record 18 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

II. Row III. Spreadsheet IV. What-if analysis V. Worksheet A. A horizontal set of cells that encompasses all the columns in a worksheet B. A file that has worksheets of data organized in a row and column format that can be used to model quantitative data C. Tabs inside a spreadsheet where data can be organized in a row and column format and can be used to model quantitative data D. All the categories of data that are formatted as a row in a worksheet E. Allows you to examine the outcome of the changes to values in a worksheet Answer: D, A, B, E, C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand spreadsheet terminology and components

91) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Active worksheet II. Workbook III. Active cell IV. Cell reference V. Keyboard shortcut A. An Excel file that contains one or more worksheets B. Identified by the thick green border C. Tab has a white background with bold letters and a thick bottom border D. Eliminates the need to use a mouse E. A reference within a formula or function instead of a value Answer: C, A, B, E, D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Navigate worksheets and workbooks

92) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Note II. Date data III. Numeric data IV. Text data V. Time data A. A text box, like a sticky note, that is attached to a cell B. Can contain any combination of printable characters C. Data that contains only the digits 0-9 and possibly a period (.)

D. Represented as a decimal value E. Stored as a serial number 19 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: A, E, C, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Document your work

93) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Cell range II. Clipboard III. Contiguous cell range IV. Destination cell V. Noncontiguous cell range A. Cells in a worksheet that have been selected B. A range consisting of multiple selected cells, all of which are directly adjacent to one another C. A range consisting of multiple selected cells, at least one of which is not directly adjacent to other cells D. The cell that receives the result of an operation E. A temporary storage location Answer: A, E, B, D, C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

94) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Normal view II. Page Break Preview III. Print Preview IV. Page Layout view V. Orientation A. Default view in Excel B. Does not show page margins, headers, or footers C. The Backstage View of a workbook D. Shows page margins, print headers and footers, and page breaks E. Layout of how the workbook will print on paper Answer: A, B, C, D, E Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Work with cells and cell ranges

20 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 2: Formats, Formulas, and Functions 1) The format that organizes information in labeled columns and numbered rows is format.

A) tabular B) graphical C) matrix D) container Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

2) Excel uses the pictures.

A) container B) sectioned C) graphical D) tabular

presentation of information via charts, graphs, and

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

3) For Windows users, the keyboard shortcut for the Comma Style format is .

A) Ctrl + Shift + # B) Ctrl + Shift + @ C) Ctrl + Shift + C D) Ctrl + Shift + !

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

4) For Windows users, the keyboard shortcut for the Short Date format is A) Ctrl + Shift + # B) Ctrl + Shift + @ C) Ctrl + Shift +  D) Ctrl + Shift + % 21 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

5) For Windows users, the keyboard shortcut for the Time format is A) Ctrl + Shift + # B) Ctrl + Shift + @ C) Ctrl + Shift +  D) Ctrl + Shift + %

.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

6) Which of the following describes the effect of applying the Comma Style to a cell in Excel?

A) It adds commas as thousand separators and two decimal places, without adding a currency symbol.

B) It aligns the text in the cell to the center and adds a border.

C) It formats the number as a percentage, including a percent symbol.

D) It removes all decimal places and aligns the text to the right.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

7) The currency symbol is aligned to the left side of the cell in the A) General B) Number C) Currency D) Accounting Number Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

8) Which of the following is NOT true about the Accounting Number Format?

A) The currency symbol placement is aligned to the left side of the cell.

B) Negative numbers are enclosed in parentheses.

C) Zero values are displayed as 0, with zeroes in each decimal place.

22 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

format.

D) The decimal place is aligned.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

9) Which of the following is NOT true about the Currency Number format?

A) Zero values are displayed as 0, with zeroes in each decimal place.

B) The currency symbol is placed directly left of the value.

C) Negative numbers can be identified with a dash or parentheses or displayed in red.

D) The currency symbol placement is aligned to the left side of the cell.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

10) The base date for date and time data in Excel 365 is A) January 1, 1000 B) January 1, 1900 C) December 31, 999 D) December 31, 1899

.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

11) When designing an Excel worksheet for accessibility, which color combination should generally be avoided due to color blindness concerns?

A) Blue and yellow B) Green and red C) Black and white D) Gray and blue Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

12) Excel stores time values as decimal portions of one A) second B) minute C) day

.

23 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) hour Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

13) Which of the following is a valid type of cell alignment in Excel?

A) Top align B) Bold align C) Center vertical D) Fill align Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

14) Which of the following describes a use of fill colors in Excel?

A) To change the text within a cell B) To highlight important values C) To apply borders to cells D) To adjust column width Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

15) When applying a fill color, it is best practice to use A) grayscale B) monochromatic C) bright D) muted or pastel

colors.

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

16) To modify the border of a cell or cells, click the Borders arrow in the group of the Home tab.

A) Font B) Paragraph C) Styles 24 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) Editing Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

17) Which of the following is NOT true about formatting worksheets?

A) Background colors should be bright colors.

B) Use color only to assist in readability, categorization, or identification purposes.

C) Format for a reason, not just for appearances.

D) Special characters such as the dollar sign should be applied only as necessary.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

18) You should use at most A) two B) three C) four D) five

fonts in a worksheet.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

19)

can set the font, font size and color, number format, background color, borders, and alignment.

A) A built-in function B) Banding C) A built-in cell style D) The fill color

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

20) Press the A) F1 B) F7 C) F4

key to begin to spell check a worksheet.

25 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) F12 Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

21) All of the following are valid cell ranges EXCEPT: A) A1: B3 B) 12E C) C2 D) C1: C25 Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

22) A(n) cell reference is the default reference in a formula to a cell address and will automatically adjust when the formula is copied or extended to other cells.

A) absolute B) relative C) mixed D) All cell references do this Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

23) Formulas always begin with A) = B) % C) $ D) ~

.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

24) Which of the following methods will allow you to keep cell references unchanged when copying a formula to another cell?

A) Press Shift + Esc while selecting the formula.

26 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) Use $ symbols to make the cell references absolute.

C) Use Ctrl + Z to undo changes before copying.

D) Press Alt + F4 to keep references constant.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

25) Formulas in Excel are created by using basic mathematical A) indicators B) references C) operators D) routines

.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

26) What is the correct order of operations used in Excel for evaluating formulas?

A) Subtraction, Multiplication, Parentheses, Addition, Division, Exponentiation B) Parentheses, Exponentiation, Multiplication, Division, Addition, Subtraction C) Exponentiation, Parentheses, Division, Multiplication, Subtraction, Addition D) Division, Multiplication, Addition, Parentheses, Subtraction, Exponentiation Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

27) A A) parameter B) subroutine C) function D) formula

is a built-in program that performs operations on data.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

28) Excel offers a large collection of functions, organized into several categories. These functions can be used for: .

A) designing webpage layouts 27 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) performing calculations and data analysis C) formatting cells D) creating animations Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

29) Which of the following describes the primary purpose of the AutoSum feature in Excel?

A) It automatically corrects spelling mistakes in cell values.

B) It creates a sum of selected cells and places the result in the adjacent cell.

C) It creates a new worksheet in the workbook.

D) It automatically applies formatting to a cell.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

30) A(n) cell is the cell that receives the result of an operation such as Paste or an AutoSum function.

A) active B) source C) destination D) adjacent Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

31) A(n) A) active B) source C) destination D) adjacent

cell is the cell that contains the data supplied to a function.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

32) If you want to total a specified range, list of numbers, list of cells, or any combination, 28 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

you would use the A) COUNT B) AVERAGE C) SUBTOTAL D) SUM

function.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

33) If you want to see how many cells in a specified range contain numbers, you would use the function.

A) COUNT B) AVERAGE C) SUBTOTAL D) SUM Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

34) If you want to determine which employee had the highest sales value (numerical data), you could use the function.

A) COUNT B) SUM C) MIN D) MAX Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

35)

formatting is a way to dynamically change the visual presentation of information in a manner that adds information to the worksheet.

A) Default B) Conditional C) Graphical D) Tabular

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use conditional formatting to assist in decision making 29 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

36) To hide a row or column in Excel, click the row or column heading, point to the selected row or column heading(s), right-click, and then select on the displayed shortcut menu.

A) Plain Formatting B) Adjust C) Hide D) Filter Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Hide information in a worksheet

37) To hide gridlines, uncheck the A) Gridlines B) Ruler C) Formula Bar D) Headings

box in the Show group on the View tab.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Hide information in a worksheet

38) To have a better sense of how the worksheet is structured, you can A) hide columns B) hide rows C) unhide gridlines D) show the formulas

.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Document functions and formulas

39) An important part of building a good worksheet is using A) calculations B) documentation C) conditional formatting D) styles Answer: B

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Document functions and formulas 30 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

40) Excel is specifically designed to present information in tabular and graphical formats.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

41) When text and numbers are organized in labeled columns and numbered rows, they are in graphical format.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

42) Excel presents information graphically via charts and graphs based on the tabular information in worksheets.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

43) The Accounting Number Format formats a cell with a comma at the thousands place and two decimal places.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

44) The Comma Style in Excel automatically adds a currency symbol to the formatted cells.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

45) The Accounting Number Format is formatted so the currency symbol is placed directly left of the value.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets 31 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

46) When a cell is formatted as Currency, zero values are displayed as 0, with zeroes in each decimal place.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

47) Excel stores time values as decimal portions of one day.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

48) By default, number formats are left-aligned.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

49) Color should be used only to assist in readability, categorization, or identification purposes.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

50) Fill color can be used to categorize information.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

51) To paint a format to more than one nonadjacent cell, you can double-click Format Painter and then select nonadjacent cells.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

52) An image CANNOT be resized in Excel—it must be resized prior to inserting it into a 32 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

worksheet.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

53) To make rapid and accurate changes to the appearance of a workbook with very little effort, you can use built-in cell styles.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

54) Only one style can be applied to a cell.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

55) The default theme for a workbook is the Excel theme.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

56) A relative cell reference is the default reference in a formula to a cell address.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

57) In Excel, formulas and functions always begin with an equal sign.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

58) A constant is a value that never changes, such as months in a year.

Answer: TRUE 33 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

59) Formatting will change the value stored in a cell.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

60) A function is a built-in program that performs operations on data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

61) In a function, arguments are included inside the parentheses following the function name.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

62) A destination cell is the location cell to be modified by a Paste or AutoSum operation.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

63) The COUNT function returns the total number of cells in a cell range that are blank.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

64) Conditional formatting can be used to highlight information by changing formats such as cell fill color, font color, and font style.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 34 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 4. Use conditional formatting to assist in decision making

65) To hide gridlines, check the Gridlines box in the Show group on the View tab.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Hide information in a worksheet

66) On a worksheet, rows and columns can only be hidden if they do not have functions in any of the cells.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Hide information in a worksheet

67) Documentation is an important part of building a good worksheet.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Document functions and formulas

68) Show Formulas can aid in correcting errors or updating the function of a worksheet.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Document functions and formulas

69) A PDF can be viewed in many different applications.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Document functions and formulas

70) A(n) pictures.

Answer: graphical

format is used to present information in charts, graphs, and

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets 35 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

71) The presentation of text and numbers in tables is called Answer: tabular

format.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

72) Cell vertically.

Answer: alignment

allows cell content to be arranged horizontally as well as

Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

73) Cell formats that are automatically in place unless you specify otherwise are called settings.

Answer: default Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

74) Answer: Fill

color is the background color of a cell.

Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

75) A built-in is a predefined and named combination of cell and content formatting properties that can be applied to a cell or range of cells.

Answer: cell style Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

76) A(n) workbook.

Answer: theme

is a collection of fonts, styles, colors, and effects applied to a

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

36 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

77) A number that never changes is a(n) Answer: constant

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

78) C12 is an example of a cell Answer: reference

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

79) A(n) performs a mathematical calculation using information in the active worksheet and other worksheets to calculate new values.

Answer: formula Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

80) +, *, and ^ are examples of Excel mathematical Answer: operators

.

Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

81) If multiple mathematical operators are included in a function or formula, Excel processes the calculations based on the .

Answer: order of operations Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Create information with formulas

82) The variables or values a function requires to calculate a solution are called .

Answer: arguments Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

83) In Excel, a(n)

is a built-in program that performs operations on data.

37 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: function Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

84) The cell that receives the result of an operation such as Paste or the AutoSum function is the cell.

Answer: destination Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

85) The cell that contains the data supplied to a function is the Answer: source

cell.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

86) The Answer: SUM

function is a commonly used function for totaling cell values.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

87) The Answer: AVERAGE

function is used to find the mean value for a range of cells.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

88) The numbers.

Answer: COUNT

function returns the number of cells in a cell range that contain

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

89) To find the smallest numerical value in a range of cells, you would use the function.

Answer: MIN 38 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

90) To find the greatest numerical value in a range of cells, you would use the function.

Answer: MAX Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

91)

formatting allows the specification of rules that apply formatting to a cell as determined by the rule outcome.

Answer: Conditional Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use conditional formatting to assist in decision making

92) The vertical and horizontal lines on a worksheet that help define a cell's boundaries are called .

Answer: gridlines Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Hide information in a worksheet

93) To columns C and D from view while still performing calculations on their data, select "Hide Columns."

Answer: hide Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Hide information in a worksheet

94) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Graphical format II. Tabular format III. Cell alignment IV. Default V. Fill color A) A setting that is automatically in place unless you specify otherwise B) The presentation of information in charts, graphs, and pictures C) The background hue of a cell 39 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) Horizontal and vertical position of cell content E) The presentation of information such as text and numbers in tables Answer: B, E, D, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

95) Match the following format names with their example.

I. Comma II. Currency III. Number IV. Accounting V. General A) $ (1,234.00) B) (1,234.00) C) 1234 D) 1234.00 E) $1,234.00 Answer: B, E, D, A, C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Format cells, cell ranges, and worksheets

96) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Function II. Argument III. Built-in function IV. Cell reference V. Destination cell A) Variables or values a function requires to calculate a solution B) A function included in Excel that can be categorized as financial, statistical, mathematical, date and time, text, and so on C) Built-in program that performs operations on data D) The cell that receives the result of an operation such as Paste or an AutoSum function E) Refers to a particular cell or range of cells instead of a value Answer: C, A, B, E, D Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

40 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

97) Match the following functions with their description.

I. SUM II. AVERAGE III. COUNT IV. MIN V. MAX A) Adds all numeric information in a specified range, list of numbers, list of cells, or any combination B) Examines all numeric values in a specified range and returns the lowest value C) Returns the number of cells in a range of cells that contain numeric data D) Examines all numeric values in a specified range and returns the highest value E) Returns a mean value from a specified range of cells Answer: A, E, C, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create information with functions

98) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Constant II. Formula III. Mathematical operator IV. Order of operations V. Conditional formatting A) A number that never changes B) Parentheses, exponentiation, division, multiplication, addition, or subtraction C) Applies formatting to cells or specific controls as determined by the rule outcome D) How Excel processes calculations in a formula that contains more than one operator E) Can contain cell references, constants, functions, and mathematical operators Answer: A, E, B, D, C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use conditional formatting to assist in decision making Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 3: Cell References, Named Ranges, and Functions 1) There are how many different types of cell references?

A) Two B) Three C) Four D) Five Answer: B 41 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references

2) An absolute cell reference is denoted by A) dollar signs ($) B) asterisks (*) C) number signs (#) D) at signs (@)

.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references 3) Cell B2 contains the formula  A4 * B6 . If you copied cell B2 to cell C1, the formula in cell C1 is .

A)  A4 * C5 B)  A4 * B6 C)  B3 * C5 D)  B3 * C6 Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references 4) When cell A4 containing the formula  $B$5 / $C$6 is copied to cell F6, the formula in cell F6 is .

A) = $G$7/$H$8 B) = $G$5:$H$6 C) = B5 / C6 D) = $B$5:$C$6 Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references

5) Instead of typing the $ symbol in a cell reference, you can press the key.

A) F4 B) F2 C) F7 42 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) F11 Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references

6) Which of the following is NOT true about array formulas?

A) Array formulas apply to a range of cells, not a single cell.

B) Array formulas always require manual recalculation.

C) The formula will spill to neighboring cells.

D) When spilling, if the data is blocked, a #SPILL! error will be returned.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use array formulas

7) Which of the following is an alternative to using a space when naming a range?

A) Use a hyphen.

B) Use an equal sign.

C) Use a backslash.

D) Use an underscore.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

8) To modify a named range, click Name Manager in the A) Defined Names group on the Home B) Edit Names group on the Home C) Defined Names group on the Formulas D) Edit Names group on the Formulas

tab.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

9)

is the keyboard shortcut to display a list of named ranges in the workbook.

A) F1 B) F2 C) F3 43 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) F4 Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

10) To display the Create Names from Selection dialog box, you click Create from Selection in the tab.

A) Defined Names group on the Formulas B) Edit Names group on the Formulas C) Defined Names group on the Home D) Edit Names group on the Home Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

11) The command produces multiple named ranges at one time from the headings in rows, columns, or both from the data set.

A) Create New Names B) Define Names C) Create from Selection D) Alt + Shift + F11 Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

12) All arguments in a function are enclosed in a pair of A) braces { } B) square brackets [ ] C) parentheses ( ) D) quotes " "

.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions

13) In the syntax of a function, optional arguments are enclosed within A) braces { } B) square brackets [ ] 44 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

C) parentheses ( ) D) quotes " " Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions

14) When using a text string in a function argument, enclose the string in so Excel will recognize it as a text string rather than a named range.

A) asterisks * * B) square brackets [ ] C) parentheses ( ) D) quotes " " Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions 15) Which of the following best describes the expression  (C5  D5) / 100 .

A) A function that calculates a sum and divides by 100 B) A text string that shows what cells are needed for a calculation C) A named range for multiple cells D) A formula that calculates the sum of C5 and D5 and then divides by 100 Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions 16) In the formula  SUM  A1: A10  , which component represents a function?

A) SUM B) A1: A10 C) = D) : Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions

17) The inputs used by an Excel function to calculate a result are called A) parameters 45 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

B) arguments C) dependent variables D) independent variables Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions

18) Which of the following is NOT an Excel function category?

A) Educational B) Cube C) Logical D) Financial Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions

19) If you wanted to find which value occurs most often in a cell range, you would use the function.

A) MODE.SNGL B) MEAN C) MEDIAN D) AVERAGE Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

20) Which of the following functions returns the number in the middle of a set of numbers?

A) COUNT B) MEAN C) MEDIAN D) COUNTA Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

21) If you wanted to determine how many cells in a range are not empty, you would use 46 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

the function.

A) HASVALUE B) NOTEMPTY C) COUNT D) COUNTA Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

22) The function returns the number of workdays between two dates.

A) NETWORKDAYS B) WORKINGDAYS C) DAYS D) WEEKNUM Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions

23) If you want to find the number of days, months, or years between two dates, you would use the function.

A) TIME B) DATE C) DATEDIF D) WEEKNUM Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions

24) The YEAR function returns the year of a date, an integer in the range A) 0 – 9000 B) 1000 – 9000 C) 1000 – 9999 D) 1900 – 9999 Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions

47 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

25) Which of the following is NOT an interval option for the DATEDIF function?

A) H B) M C) D D) Y Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions

26) What is the process of removing unwanted characters, correcting formatting issues, or standardizing data in a text cell called?

A) Sanitizing B) Concatenating C) Cleansing D) Purifying Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use text functions 27) The result of  CONCAT("12"," 34") is

.

A) 45 B) 1234 C) 22 D) 12,34 Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use text functions

28) The result of =LEFT("Dallas, Texas",9) is A) as, Texas B) Dallas, T C) Dallas,Te D) las,Texas

.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use text functions

48 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

29) The result of =FIND("is","Mississippi",3) is A) 5 B) 2 C) 4 D) 6

.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use text functions

30) The result of =MID("Tallahassee",6,3) is A) Tall B) lahass C) has D) hassee

.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use text functions

31) Given a student's numerical average and a table that lists the percent ranges needed to obtain each letter grade in column format, which Excel function would be used to determine the student's letter grade if the numerical average is used as a lookup value?

A) MATCH B) INDEX C) HLOOKUP D) VLOOKUP Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use lookup and financial functions

32) Which of the following is NOT a financial function?

A) PMT B) APR C) PPMT D) N PV Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use lookup and financial functions 49 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

33)

is the interest charged on both the principal and the interest that accumulates on a loan.

A) Simple interest B) APR C) The interest payment D) Compound interest

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use lookup and financial functions

34) Which of the following is NOT a comparison operator symbol?

A)  B) = C) < D) >= Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Use logical functions and troubleshoot functions 35) If the value in cell B4 is 40, what is the result of  IF  B4  65,"Passing","Failing"  ?

A) TRUE B) FALSE C) Passing D) Failing Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Use logical functions and troubleshoot functions

36) Which of the following is NOT an actual error message in Excel?

A) #NAME? B) #NPV? C) #REF! D) #VALUE! Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Use logical functions and troubleshoot functions 50 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

37) What is the error message that results when you attempt to use a deleted cell as a function argument in a formula?

A) #NPV? B) #NAME? C) #REF! D) #N/A Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Use logical functions and troubleshoot functions

38) What is the error message that results when you calculate the following in cell A1:  2756 / 0 ?

A) #VALUE! B) #DIV/0!

C) #REF! D) #N/A Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Use logical functions and troubleshoot functions

39) Which of the following is NOT a guideline to follow when building formulas and functions?

A) Do not overuse parentheses. For example, use =SUM(Sales) instead of =(SUM(Sales)).

B) Avoid unneeded spaces in formulas.

C) Always put quotation marks around numeric values.

D) Use the negative sign, as in 333 , to indicate negative numbers in formulas, rather than (333).

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Use logical functions and troubleshoot functions

40) If you want to know the total number of employees who have worked for you at least 5 years and are not managers, you would use the function.

A) COUNTIFS B) SUMIFS C) COUNTIF D) SUMIF 51 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 10. Use conditional aggregate functions

41) Absolute cell referencing uses the # symbol.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references 42) The expression  $B$2 - C5 is an example of mixed cell referencing.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references 43) When cell D3 containing the formula  C4 * B4 is copied to cell F2, the formula in cell F2 is  C4 * B4 .

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references 44) When cell A3 containing the formula  $A$5  $B$6 is copied to cell C5, the formula in cell C5 is  $C$7  $D$8 .

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references 45) When cell B3 containing the formula  $B4  C$5 is copied to cell D6, the formula in cell D6 is  $B7  E$5 .

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references

46) An array formula returns values to neighboring cells; this is called spilling.

52 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Use array formulas

47) A named range is a group of cells that have been given a name, which you can use when writing a formula or function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

48) The name of a range can begin with the / symbol.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

49) The name of a range CANNOT contain any spaces.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

50) If you incorrectly name a range, you can rename it by selecting the data and naming the range again.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

51) If you type =C, a list of functions and named ranges beginning with the letter "C" appears.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

52) Formatting is the structure and order of the function and the arguments used by Excel to perform a calculation.

53 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions 53) The result of  ROUNDDOWN  98.765,0  is 98.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

54) Functions can be created by using the Function Arguments dialog box or by typing the function in the cell.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

55) Excel's AVERAGE function returns the mean of a set of numbers.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

56) Excel's MAXIMUM function can be used to find the largest number in a range of numbers.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

57) Excel's RANDBETWEEN function always returns a random decimal number between 0 and 1.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

58) Excel's WEEKDAY function returns a number from 1-7 or 0-6.

54 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions

59) Excel's DAY function returns the day of the month.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions

60) Excel's TODAY function returns the number of minutes in the range 1 to 60.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions

61) The TODAY and NOW functions return the same result.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions 62) The result of  DATEDIF  "12 / 21/ 2022","11/ 02 / 2027"," Y "  is 4.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions 63) The result of  LEFT  " Washington",4  is Wash.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use text functions 64) The result of  LEN  "54"  is 9.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 55 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 7. Use text functions

65) The TRIM function returns text with any leading, trailing, or extra spaces between words removed.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use text functions

66) $C$8 is an example of a(n) Answer: absolute

cell reference.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references

67) B7 is an example of a(n) Answer: relative

cell reference.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references

68) A(n) range is an extension of a cell reference and provides a way to identify commonly used cell references or ranges.

Answer: named Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create named ranges

69) A(n) Answer: argument

is a variable or value a function requires to calculate a solution.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions

70) A(n) is a named calculation which Excel uses to calculate the output based on the provided input.

Answer: function Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions 56 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

71)

refers to the structure and order of the function and the arguments used by Excel to perform a calculation.

Answer: Syntax Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions 72) The result of  ABS(6 * -2) is

.

Answer: 12 Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

73) The function rounds down any decimal values associated with a number to the nearest whole integer.

Answer: INT Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions 74) The result of  ROUND 123.456,2  is

.

Answer: 123.46 Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

75) To count the number of non-empty cells in a range, use the Answer: COUNTA

function.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

76) In the number set 1 to 5, 3 would be the middle of the data, also called the .

Answer: median Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

57 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

77) To count the number of cells in a range of cells that contain numeric data, use the function.

Answer: COUNT Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

78) To find the greatest numerical value in a range of cells, you would use the function.

Answer: MAX Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

79) Excel's Answer: NOW

function returns the current date and time.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions

80) Excel's Answer: TODAY

function returns only the current date.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions

81) The Answer: DATEDIF

function calculates the difference between two dates.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use date and time functions

82)

text refers to the process of removing unwanted characters, rearranging data in a cell, correcting erroneous data, and/or standardizing data.

Answer: Cleansing Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use text functions

83)

functions are functions that manage, manipulate, and format strings of 58 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

data.

Answer: Text Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use text functions

84) The function searches for a value in the first column of a table of data and returns a value from a subsequent column in the same row.

Answer: VLOOKUP Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use lookup and financial functions

85) In financial applications, the term such as monthly or quarterly payments.

Answer: period

refers to the frequency of payments,

Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use lookup and financial functions

86) A(n) Answer: logical

function determines if a statement is either true or false.

Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Use logical functions and troubleshoot functions

87) All functions are structured around the concept of declaring a position or statement that Excel will evaluate and return as true or false.

Answer: logical Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Use logical functions and troubleshoot functions

88) The logical function will return one of two values depending upon whether the logical test being evaluated is true or false.

Answer: IF Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Use logical functions and troubleshoot functions

59 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

89) The function allows for multiple criteria in multiple ranges to be evaluated and counted.

Answer: COUNTIFS Diff: 3 Objective: 10. Use conditional aggregate functions

90) The function returns the maximum value of a range of data based on criteria specified.

Answer: MAXIFS Diff: 2 Objective: 11. Use conditional math functions

91) The conditional math function can be used to find the total amount spent of customers in Pennsylvania who are premium reward members.

Answer: SUMIFS Diff: 2 Objective: 11. Use conditional math functions

92) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Absolute cell reference II. Cell reference III. Mixed cell reference IV. Named range V. Relative cell reference A) A group of cells that have been given a name B) The exact address of a cell when both the column and the row need to remain constant C) Changes automatically when the formula or function is copied to another location D) A combination of relative and absolute cell references E) Refers to a particular cell or range of cells within a formula or function instead of a value Answer: B, E, D, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the types of cell references

93) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Name Manager II. Argument 60 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

III. Function IV. Syntax V. Function Arguments A) The structure and order of a function B) Used to create, edit, delete, or troubleshoot named ranges C) A dialog box that provides additional information and previews results of a function D) A built-in formula that calculates a result E) A variable or value the function requires to calculate a solution Answer: B, E, D, A, C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions

94) Match the following function categories with their description.

I. Cube II. Date & Time III. Financial IV. Compatibility V. Statistical A) Works with serial date and time values B) Works with common financial formulas C) Works with common statistical calculations D) Works with data and filtering, similar to PivotTables E) A set of functions that are compatible with older versions of Excel Answer: D, A, B, E, C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions

95) Match the following function categories with their description.

I. Logical II. Lookup & Reference III. Math & Trig IV. Text V. Web A) Works with strings of data B) Works with URL, XML, and web services connections C) Evaluates expressions or conditions as being either true or false D) Works with indexing and retrieving information from data sets E) Works with mathematics Answer: C, D, E, A, B 61 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create and structure functions

96) Match the following functions with their definition.

I. ABS II. INT III. ROUND IV. COUNT V. COUNTA A) Rounds a number down to the nearest integer B) Rounds a number to a specified number of digits C) Returns the absolute value of a number D) Counts the number of cells in a range that are not empty E) Counts the number of cells in a range that contain numbers Answer: C, A, B, E, D Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

97) Match the following functions with their definition.

I. MEDIAN II. AVERAGE III. COUNTBLANK IV. MODE.SNGL V. COUNTA A) Returns the middle value of a set of numbers B) Returns the most frequently occurring value in a range of data C) Counts the number of empty cells in a range D) Counts the number of cells in a range that are not empty E) Returns the arithmetic mean from a set of numbers Answer: A, E, C, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use math and statistical functions

98) Match the following functions with their definition.

I. NOW II. TODAY III. DATEDIF IV. LEFT V. FIND 62 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) Returns the computer system date and time B) Returns the time unit specified between two dates, including the two dates C) Searches for text within text D) Returns a string num_chars long from the left side of text E) Returns the computer system date Answer: A, E, B, D, C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use text functions Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 4: Effective Charts 1) The combination of the graphical presentation of data with a focus on qualitative understanding is called data .

A) development B) hypothesis C) persuasion D) visualization Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

2) When creating a chart, best practices indicate that you first consider A) the basic design of the chart B) the data C) who will be viewing the chart D) how quickly it needs to be created

.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

3) When you select a pie chart in Excel, how are the source data cells visually indicated?

A) A dotted border appears around the cells B) A blue highlight and border appear around the cells C) The values in the cells are underlined D) An asterisk symbol appears on the cells Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles 63 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

4) When you select a pie chart in Excel, how are the Series Names (labels) visually indicated in the worksheet?

A) An asterisk appears next to each label B) A dotted border appears around the cells C) A purple highlight and border appear around the cells D) The text becomes bold in the cells Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

5) A group of related data values to be charted is a(n) A) analysis B) data bar C) data point D) data series

.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

6) An individual data value in a data series is a data A) mark B) bar C) point D) series

.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

7) If a chart is inserted on the same worksheet as the data, it is worksheet.

A) a chart sheet B) integrated C) embedded D) wrapped Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Explore the position of charts 64 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

on the

8) If a chart is placed on a special worksheet that is dedicated to displaying chart objects, it is .

A) on a chart sheet B) integrated C) embedded D) an external object Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Explore the position of charts

9) The tool is a contextual tool that appears when you select data in a worksheet.

A) Quick Analysis B) Sparklines C) Quick Chart D) Insert Charts Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

10) The analyzes data with visual summaries, patterns, and trends.

A) Live Preview B) Quick Analysis tool C) Recommended Charts feature D) Analyze Data feature Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

11) Once data in a worksheet is selected, the offers single-click access to formatting, charts, formulas, PivotTables, and sparklines.

A) Live Preview B) Quick Analysis tool C) Recommended Charts feature D) Analyze Data feature Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types 65 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

12) A chart is best used to display how different categories contribute to a total, such as representing the percentage of monthly expenses.

A) line B) scatter C) pie D) stacked column Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

13) A chart is used to visualize trends over time.

A) line B) column C) pie D) stacked column Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

14) A(n) chart is useful for visually comparing the values of different categories against one another, such as sales figures for different products.

A) combination B) column C) area D) scatter Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

15) A(n) chart is similar to a column chart except the data is displayed horizontally instead of vertically.

A) bar B) combination C) area D) pie Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types 66 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

16) A(n) chart is useful when the sum of the data values is as important as the individual items.

A) bar B) stacked bar C) area D) sunburst Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

17) A chart is very common as a statistical tool depicting the correlation between two numeric variables.

A) combination B) bar C) column D) scatter Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

18) A(n) chart is a variation of a stacked line chart that emphasizes the magnitude of change over time and visually depicts a trend.

A) combination B) bar C) area D) column Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

19) A(n) chart displays two different types of data by using multiple chart types in a single chart object.

A) column B) combination C) area D) scatter Answer: B Diff: 2 67 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

20) A chart displays hierarchical data.

A) scatter B) stacked bar C) sunburst D) combination Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

21) A chart style, found in the Chart Styles group on the Chart Design tab, refers to a predefined combination of that changes the overall appearance of the chart.

A) data labels and axes B) colors, fonts, and effects C) gridlines and trendlines D) chart elements and titles Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Change chart data and styles for presentations

22) A chart layout, found in the Chart Layouts group on the Chart Design tab, refers to the arrangement of chart elements such as , which help in structuring the data presentation.

A) colors and fonts B) background effects and shadows C) data series and axes values D) titles, legends, and data labels Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Change chart data and styles for presentations

23) The source of information that a chart uses to generate its visuals, including labels and values, is the data.

A) worksheet B) brand C) raw 68 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) non-cleansed Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Change chart data and styles for presentations

24) The lines that go across charts to help gauge the size of the bars, columns, or data lines are called chart .

A) trendlines B) gridlines C) data points D) area grids Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Change chart data and styles for presentations

25) The data.

A) x-axis labels B) title C) legend D) y-axis labels

is/are an index within a chart that provides information about the

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Change chart data and styles for presentations

26) In Excel, the default for charts is to display the A) trendlines B) minor gridlines C) major gridlines D) major and minor gridlines

.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Change chart data and styles for presentations

27) To change options such as the background color, border, or effects for the entire chart, right-click the chart border, and then select .

A) Format Properties 69 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) Chart Properties C) Format Chart Area D) Chart Formatting Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Edit and format charts to add emphasis

28) Which of the following is NOT true about modifying chart axes?

A) Excel knows best in regard to formatting the axes; thus, if it seems to be crowded, it probably is not.

B) The Format Axis task pane can be used to manually set the axis options.

C) The default Excel scale minimum and maximum values are set automatically based on the data.

D) The x-axis and y-axis scales are automatically created through a mathematical algorithm within Excel.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Edit and format charts to add emphasis

29) A chart element can be easily removed by selecting the element and pressing .

A) Esc B) Ctrl + Delete C) Delete D) Alt + Delete Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Edit and format charts to add emphasis

30) A(n) A) axis B) trendline C) data bar D) legend

is a line that shows the general direction of the charted data.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Edit and format charts to add emphasis 70 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

31)

are small charts that are embedded into the cells in a worksheet.

A) Sparklines B) Trendlines C) Data bars D) Data points

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use sparklines and data bars to emphasize data

32) A is a graphic component that is overlaid onto data in worksheet cells to indicate the relative magnitude of the data value within a range.

A) sparkline B) trendline C) data bar D) data point Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use sparklines and data bars to emphasize data

33) From a chart sheet, a chart will print .

A) as a full page B) with two on a page C) with four on a page D) Charts cannot be printed from a chart sheet.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Recognize and correct confusing charts

34) Which of the following is considered acceptable when creating a chart?

A) Using a color scheme that is accessible to those who are colorblind, even if the color scheme is not universally liked B) Adding too much information that makes the chart overwhelming C) Designing a chart that has poor readability D) Choosing an incorrect chart type that does not fit the data Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Recognize and correct confusing charts 71 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

35) Which of the following is NOT considered a good practice for ensuring chart readability?

A) Ensure the color scheme is readable and accessible to all users, including those with color blindness.

B) Add a chart title that conveys context of time and scope.

C) Simplify the chart by moving data labels and removing unnecessary information.

D) Avoid misleading information or labeling.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Recognize and correct confusing charts

36) Charts are an important component of data visualization.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

37) A chart is like a picture, where a picture is worth a thousand words.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

38) Creating an effective chart often requires multiple adjustments and refinements to achieve the desired clarity and impact.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

39) The first task that needs to take place when creating a chart is to organize the data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

40) When you click an existing chart, you initially activate the legend.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 72 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

41) A data point represents a collection of related values in a chart.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

42) An individual data value is a data series.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

43) The Chart Elements, Chart Styles, and Chart Filters buttons can be used to directly change the values in the worksheet that are used in the chart.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

44) In business, it is important to present a well-designed chart because the chart can become a reflection on you and your company.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

45) Any action that can be completed in the Chart Elements, Chart Styles, or Chart Filters buttons can also be completed on the Chart Design and Format contextual tabs on the ribbon.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

46) Click outside a chart object or press Esc to deselect an object.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 73 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

47) When a chart is created, it is automatically placed on a chart sheet.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Explore the position of charts

48) A chart sheet is a special worksheet that is dedicated to displaying chart objects.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Explore the position of charts

49) A chart sheet contains gridlines.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Explore the position of charts

50) The Recommended Charts feature offers single-click access to formatting, charts, formulas, PivotTables, and sparklines.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

51) The Quick Analysis tool can be used to automatically create complex PivotTables based on the selected data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

52) You can resize a chart by clicking and dragging a sizing handle.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types 74 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

53) A line chart is used to display parts of a whole.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

54) A pie chart shows trends over time.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

55) Bar charts are similar to column charts.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

56) Stacked bar charts can be useful when you want to see how the individual parts add up to create the entire length of each bar.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

57) A scatter chart shows the relationship between two numeric variables.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

58) A column chart is primarily used to show the relationship of parts to a whole.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

59) A legend is used in a chart to identify the different data series represented by colors or patterns.

Answer: TRUE 75 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Change chart data and styles for presentations

60) The default display of gridlines in an Excel chart is to display the major gridlines and hide the minor gridlines.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Change chart data and styles for presentations

61) Chart sizes can be locked so they do not resize when columns or rows are resized.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Edit and format charts to add emphasis

62) As data moves up or down in a chart, a moving average trendline will curve and adjust.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Edit and format charts to add emphasis

63) Trendlines help gauge the size of the bars, columns, or data lines in a chart.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Edit and format charts to add emphasis

64) A sparkline is a type of conditional formatting.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Use sparklines and data bars to emphasize data

65) Data understanding.

Answer: visualization

is the graphical presentation of data focusing on qualitative

Diff: 2 76 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

66) Businesses have three primary objectives in charting: data analysis, testing, and persuasion.

Answer: hypothesis Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

67) When first creating a chart, best practice dictates that you first consider and develop the basic of the chart.

Answer: design Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

68) A data Answer: point

is an individual data value in a data series.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

69) The overall visual appearance of a chart, including colors, fonts, and effects, is determined by its .

Answer: style Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

70) When a pie chart is selected, a(n) linked to the chart's legend labels.

Answer: border

appears around the data range

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

71) A group of related data values to be charted is a data Answer: series

.

Diff: 2 77 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 1. Explore chart types, layouts, and styles

72) A(n) Answer: chart sheet

is a special worksheet that only contains a chart object.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Explore the position of charts

73) A(n) data.

Answer: embedded

chart is a chart that is located on the same worksheet with the

Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Explore the position of charts

74) The tool is a contextual tool that provides single-click access to charts and PivotTables.

Answer: Quick Analysis Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

75) The feature analyzes a selection in a worksheet and suggests which chart types would best fit the data.

Answer: Recommended Charts Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

76) To resize a chart, click and drag a(n) Answer: sizing handle

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

77) A(n) Answer: pie

chart represents the relationship of parts to a whole.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types 78 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

78) The best chart to display how stocks you own have performed over the past year is the chart.

Answer: line Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

79) A(n) Answer: bar

chart displays a horizontal representation of categorical data.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

80) A(n) chart is displayed vertically and is useful for comparing categorized data sets.

Answer: column Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

81) A(n) bar chart can be used when the sum of the data values is as important as the individual items.

Answer: stacked Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

82) If you wanted to see if there is relationship between two numeric variables, such as the miles per hour over the speed limit recorded on a ticket and the amount of the resulting fine, you would use a(n) chart.

Answer: scatter Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

83) A(n) chart stacks a series of colored layers and can be used to see trends over a period of time.

Answer: area Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types 79 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

84) A(n) chart displays two different types of data using multiple chart types in a single chart.

Answer: combination Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

85) A(n) Answer: sunburst

chart displays hierarchical data through the use of rings.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

86) The chart.

Answer: legend

is used to identify the different data series represented in the

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Change chart data and styles for presentations

87) Chart data lines.

Answer: gridlines

are lines that help determine the size of the bars, columns, or

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Change chart data and styles for presentations

88) You should use the Answer: 3-D

effect and rotation of a chart conservatively.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Edit and format charts to add emphasis

89) Small charts that are inserted into cells are called Answer: sparklines

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use sparklines and data bars to emphasize data

90) A common method used to emphasize part of a pie chart is to 80 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

a slice.

Answer: explode Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use sparklines and data bars to emphasize data

91) A common method used to show a numerical relationship in a scatter chart is to add a(n) .

Answer: trendline Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use sparklines and data bars to emphasize data

92)

are typically used to show trends or patterns in data and appear within a single cell.

Answer: Sparklines Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Use sparklines and data bars to emphasize data

93) The graphic components used to visually represent the relative value of data directly within worksheet cells are called .

Answer: data bars Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use sparklines and data bars to emphasize data

94) Data can be added to cells using the Conditional Formatting feature to visually represent the magnitude of values.

Answer: bars Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use sparklines and data bars to emphasize data

95) If you want to print only a chart from a worksheet, you must first chart before accessing the print settings.

Answer: select Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Recognize and correct confusing charts

81 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

the

96) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Data visualization II. Data point III. Data series IV. Chart sheet V. Embedded chart A) Worksheet dedicated entirely to displaying chart objects B) Graphical presentation of data to improve understanding C) A chart that is placed directly within the same worksheet that contains the data it represents D) Group of related data values E) Individual data value Answer: B, E, D, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Explore the position of charts

97) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Quick Analysis II. Recommended Charts III. Pie chart IV. Line chart V. Bar chart A) A chart used to show changes in data over time B) Tool that provides single-click access to features like formatting, charts, and formulas C) A chart that displays data horizontally and is used for comparison among individual items D) A chart that shows how individual parts relate to a whole E) A feature that suggests chart types based on your data selection Answer: B, E, D, A, C Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Understand different chart types

98) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Column chart II. Scatter chart III. Area chart IV. Combination chart V. Sparkline A) A chart that shows the relationship between numeric variables 82 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) A chart that emphasizes the magnitude of change over time and depicts trends C) Small charts embedded into cells on a spreadsheet D) A chart that is used to compare data across categories and show change, sometimes over time E) A chart that displays two different types of data by using multiple chart types in a single chart object Answer: D, A, B, E, C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use sparklines and data bars to emphasize data Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 5: Complex Logical and Retrieval Functions 1)

functions enable evaluation and choices to be integrated into an Excel spreadsheet.

A) Logical B) Comparison C) Decision D) Conditional

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Preview the workbook

2) The A) AND B) IFERROR C) IF D) OR

function is the most commonly used logical function in Excel.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Preview the workbook

3) Which of the following is NOT a common logical function?

A) IF B) COUNT C) OR D) NOT Answer: B Diff: 1 83 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 1. Preview the workbook

4) A(n) competition.

A) unfair B) business C) competitive D) generated

advantage is the strategic advantage that a business has over its

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Preview the workbook

5)

If cell B2 contains the golf club purchase amount in the Pro Shop, which of the following IF statements will correctly calculate the final price after applying a 10% discount for orders over $100?

A)  IF(B2  100, B2 * 0.1) B)  IF B2  100, B2 * 0.9, B2  C)  IF B2  100, "10% discount ", B2 * 0.9  D)  IF B2  100, B2  10, B2 

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

6) The second argument of the IF function is A) [value_if_true] B) [value_if_false] C) logical_test D) criteria

.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

7) If cell B7 contains a value that is greater than 20, and "ORDER" will be displayed when the logical test is TRUE, which of the following contains the correct IF function syntax?

A)  IF B7  20,"ORDER","OK "  84 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B)  IF B7  20,"OK ","ORDER"  C)  IF B7  20,"ORDER","OK "  D)  IF B7  20,"OK ","ORDER"  Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

8) If cell A2 contains a value that is less than 75, and "SEND" will be displayed when the logical test is FALSE, which of the following contains the correct IF function syntax?

A)  IF  A2  75,"SEND","DON' T SEND"  B)  IF  A2  75,"DON' T SEND","SEND"  C)  IF  A2  75,"SEND","DON' T SEND"  D)  IF  A2  75,"DON' T SEND","SEND"  Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

9) All of the following statements are TRUE about the IF function EXCEPT: A) The [value_if_false] argument may be omitted from the IF function.

B) The IF function is the most common logical function.

C) The [value_if_true] argument of the IF function is optional.

D) Cell references listed in the IF function must be capitalized.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

10) AND, OR, and NOT are examples of Excel A) conjunction B) combination C) aggregate D) union

functions.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions 85 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

11) An IF function supports A) zero B) one C) two D) as many that are needed

logical test(s).

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

12) Which of the following statements about conjunction functions is FALSE? A) The AND function returns TRUE if all logical tests are true.

B) The NOT function returns the reverse of the logical value to which the logical test evaluates.

C) The OR function returns TRUE if at least one of the logical tests are true.

D) The AND and OR functions cannot be used in the same IF function.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

13) The AND function returns TRUE if A) only one B) none C) at least one D) all

logical tests are true.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

14) The OR function returns TRUE if A) only one B) none C) at least one D) both

of the logical tests are true.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

86 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

15) Which of the following is the correct syntax when using the AND function within the IF function?

A)  IF  B3  5 AND C1  7  ,"Pass","Fail"  B)  IF  AND B3  5,C1  7  ,"Pass","Fail"  C)  IF  AND B3  5 OR C1  7  ,"Pass","Fail"  D)  AND IF B3  5,C1  7  ,"Pass","Fail"  Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Integrate complex conjunction functions into IF functions

16) A common method for dividing up the logic of an IF function into outcomes and conditions is known as a(n) .

A) E-chart B) P-chart C) T-chart D) Z-chart Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Integrate complex conjunction functions into IF functions

17) The IFS function allows you to test many conditions. The last logical test should be .

A) False B) Positive C) True D) Negative Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

18) If none of the conditions specified in the IFS function are met, the function will return .

A) #REF! B) #NAME? C) #NUM! D) #N/A 87 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

19) The following function is an example of a(n) function.  IF(SUM(H2 : J7)  High _ Sales,.05,IF(SUM(H2 : J7)  Medium _ Sales,.025,"No Commission")) A) integrated B) nested C) detailed D) compound Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

20) All of the following statements are TRUE about nested IF functions EXCEPT: A) Each nested function needs a pair of parentheses.

B) Excel color-codes parentheses to indicate which parentheses are paired.

C) Nested IF functions permit more than two outcomes.

D) The outcome of a nested IF function is limited to numeric or text values.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

21) A function.

A) multiple B) composite C) nested D) multipart

IF function uses IF functions as arguments within another IF

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

22) Which of the following statements about the VLOOKUP function is FALSE? A) The HLOOKUP function is more commonly used than the VLOOKUP function.

B) The "V" in VLOOKUP stands for vertical and is used when your comparison 88 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

values are located in a column or vertically to the left of the data that you want to find.

C) You can use VLOOKUP to look up a value and then, using that value as a reference, return data that is associated with that value.

D) VLOOKUP functions are extremely valuable when working with tables where the data is in columns.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

23) The third argument of the VLOOKUP function is A) lookup_value B) col_index_num C) [range_lookup] D) table_array

.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

24) If the VLOOKUP range_lookup argument has the exact match with the lookup_value argument is required.

A) YES B) NO C) TRUE D) FALSE

value entered, an

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

25) In the VLOOKUP function below, which of the following statements is NOT true? =VLOOKUP(A6,Shifts,5,FALSE) A) The content of A6 is the value to be found in the leftmost column of the table array.

B) Shifts is the name assigned to the table array being used by the function.

C) The number in the third argument stands for how many total columns exist in the table array.

D) The contents of the fourth argument requires an exact match with the first argument.

Answer: C 89 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

26) The function allows for the data to be organized vertically or horizontally—the orientation of the data does not matter for the function.

A) HLOOKUP B) VLOOKUP C) XLOOKUP D) TLOOKUP Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

27) In the HLOOKUP function below, which of the following statements is NOT true? =HLOOKUP(C12,Prices,3,TRUE) A) The content of C12 is compared to the contents of the third row of the table array.

B) Prices is the name assigned to the table array being used by the function.

C) The number in the third argument stands for the number of the row containing the data that should be returned, such as price.

D) The contents of the fourth argument requires an approximate match with the first argument.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

28) The function is a useful tool for detecting an error and displaying a user-friendly message.

A) IFMISTAKE B) ISMISTAKE C) IFERROR D) ISERROR Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

29) The errors.

function works like the IFERROR function but only for #N/A 90 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) ISERROR B) IFNA C) IFMISTAKE D) ISMISTAKE Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

30) Which pair of Excel functions, when used together, allows you to perform flexible lookups across multiple columns and rows without being limited to a single lookup column?

A) SUM and AVERAGE B) VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP C) IF and COUNTIF D) INDEX and MATCH Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

31) The function looks for a value within a range and returns the position of that value within the range.

A) INDEX B) MATCH C) INDIRECT D) VLOOKUP Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

32) Which of the following is the correct syntax for the INDEX function?

A)  INDEX  array,row _ num, column _ num  B)  INDEX  column _ num,row _ num,array 

C)  INDEX  array,column _ num, row _ num  D)  INDEX  row _ num,column _ num,array  Answer: A Diff: 3 91 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

33) All of the following statements are TRUE regarding the INDIRECT function EXCEPT: A) The INDIRECT function can change a text string within a cell to a cell reference.

B) The INDIRECT function has three arguments.

C) The INDIRECT function's first argument is usually a cell reference or a text string.

D) The cell reference in the INDIRECT function reroutes to a new reference.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

34) Which of the following best describes how the LET function can help improve formulas in Excel?

A) By allowing users to create internal variables within the formula, reducing repetition and improving readability B) By providing a way to automatically update external references C) By enabling more advanced formatting within cells D) By allowing users to convert text to columns more efficiently Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Increase efficiency and clarity using the LET function

35) The strategic advantage that a business has over its competition is known as a differentiation advantage.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Preview the workbook

36) The IF function can employ other logical functions nested within the function as arguments.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

37) The IF function provides two outcomes, one when its logical test is true and one when its logical test is false.

92 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

38) An IF function allows for three separate outcomes based on the logical test.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

39) AND, OR, and THEN are all examples of conjunction functions.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

40) The OR function is used when any combination of logical tests must have at least one TRUE outcome.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

41) At least one logical test must be included for the AND function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

42) The NEVER function allows a logical statement to return TRUE if the condition is FALSE. Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

43) A T-chart is a common method for dividing up the logic into outcomes and conditions.

Answer: TRUE 93 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Integrate complex conjunction functions into IF functions

44) A nested IF function decreases the number of logical outcomes that can be expressed.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

45) A nested IF function requires one or more IF functions joined by an AND function.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

46) Excel color codes parentheses for each function used in a nested function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

47) The IFS function allows you to test up to 127 different conditions, specifying a value_if_true for each.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

48) If none of the conditions specified in an IFS function are met, the function will return #REF!.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

49) Building a worksheet for flexibility better supports decision making.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 94 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

50) When writing a nested IF function, the number of IF functions needed is always two less than the number of outcomes.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

51) The VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP functions are used to look up a value and return data that is associated with that value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

52) The VLOOKUP function is the more commonly used LOOKUP function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

53) The XLOOKUP function requires that the data be oriented in a vertical fashion.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

54) The syntax for the IFERROR function is =IFERROR(value,value_if_true) Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

55) When eliminating errors, you should begin with formulas that are simple and do not reference other cells that have formulas.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions 95 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

56) The IFNA function works like the IFERROR function but only for #NAME? errors.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

57) The MATCH function looks for a value within a range and returns the position of that value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

58) The INDIRECT function is valuable because it can change a cell reference to a text string.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

59) On a worksheet, if numbers appear as the column headings, then the reference style for Excel is A1.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

60) If letters appear for the column headings, the reference style for Excel is currently R1C1.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

61) In the R1C1 reference style, if a value is in the third row and fourth column, the cell reference would be R3C4.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions 96 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

62) The LET function allows you to define name/value pairs (a variable) and then use those variable(s) in a calculation.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Increase efficiency and clarity using the L ET function

63) The foundation of a logical function is a logical Answer: test

or logical expression.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

64) The symbols < and > are examples of logical Answer: operators

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

65) A(n) is the strategic advantage that a business has over its competition.

Answer: competitive advantage Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

66)

used in functions let Excel know that the element they surround is a

text string.

Answer: Quotes, Quotation marks Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

67) The Answer: IF

function is the most common logical function.

Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

68)

functions, such as AND or OR, allow combining multiple logical 97 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

conditions within an IF function.

Answer: Conjunction Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

69) The fit the criteria.

Answer: NOT

function is appropriate when there is only one option that does not

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

70) When a(n) function is nested in the logical_test argument of an IF function, both logical tests need to be TRUE for the [value_if_true] argument to be returned.

Answer: AND Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

71) The is true.

Answer: OR

function returns TRUE if at least one of the logical tests supplied

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Integrate basic conjunction functions into IF functions

72) A visual tool often used to organize the outcomes and conditions of logical functions, such as IF, is called a(n) .

Answer: T-chart Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Integrate complex conjunction functions into IF functions

73) A(n) expressed.

Answer: nested

IF function increases the logical outcomes that can be

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes 98 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

74) A pair of Answer: parentheses

is needed around each nested function.

Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

75) If none of the conditions specified in an IFS function are met, and no default value is provided, the function will return .

Answer: #N/A Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

76) A(n) IF function uses IF functions as arguments within other IF functions and increases the number of logical outcomes that can be expressed.

Answer: nested Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

77) When writing a nested IF function, the number of IF functions needed is always less than the number of outcomes.

Answer: one, 1 Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

78) The number of parentheses needed to close your nested IF functions at the end of your formula is always the as the number of IF functions you used.

Answer: same number, same Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

79) A(n) function takes a value, looks for it in the leftmost column of a table of data, and then returns a value from the same row but in a different column.

Answer: VLOOKUP Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions 99 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

80) The V in VLOOKUP stands for Answer: vertical

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

81) The function searches for a value in the topmost row of a table of data, and then returns a value from the same column but in a different row.

Answer: HLOOKUP Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

82) The datasets.

Answer: XLOOKUP

function allows you to retrieve data in both vertical and horizontal

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

83) The function is a useful tool for detecting an error and displaying something more user friendly than the default error message.

Answer: IFERROR Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

84) The IFNA function works like the IFERROR function but only for errors.

Answer: #N/A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions

85) The of that value.

Answer: MATCH

function looks for a value within a range and returns the position

Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions 100 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

86) The function returns the value of an element in a table or array selected by the row and column numbers.

Answer: INDEX Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

87) The Answer: INDIRECT

function can change a text string within a cell to a cell reference.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

88) If letters appear for the column headings, the reference style for Excel is .

Answer: A1 Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

89) If numbers appear for the column headings, the reference style for Excel is .

Answer: R1C1 Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

90) The function allows for greater clarity and efficiency by allowing you to define name/value pairs (a variable) and then use those variable(s) in a calculation.

Answer:LET Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Increase Efficiency and Clarity Using the L ET Function

91) Match the following terms to their description.

I. Logical function II. Logical test III. Logical operator IV. IF Function V. NESTED IF 101 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A. Mathematical comparison symbols used to create logical tests B. Used to evaluate a condition and return different outcomes based on whether the condition is met C. The most common include IF, AND, OR, and NOT D. Allows multiple conditions to be tested in sequence, with different results for each condition E. An equation that can be evaluated as either true or false Answer: C, E, A, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

92) Match the following terms to their description.

I. AND function II. OR function III. NOT function IV. T-chart V. IFS function A) Reverses the value of its logical argument (TRUE becomes FALSE and vice versa) B) Allows you to test up to 127 different conditions C) Returns TRUE if at least one logical test supplied is true D) A visual method for organizing logical conditions and outcomes E) Returns TRUE if all logical tests supplied are true Answer: E, C, A, D, B Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use IFS and nested IF functions to solve for more than two outcomes

93) Match the following terms to their arguments.

I. VLOOKUP function II. MATCH function III. INDEX function IV. INDIRECT function V. IFERROR function A) value, value_if_error B) lookup_value, table_array, col_index_num, [range_lookup] C) ref_text, [A1] D) lookup_value, lookup_array, [match_type] E) array, row_num, [column_num] Answer: B, D, E, C, A Diff: 2 102 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 6. Retrieve data using INDEX, MATCH, and INDIRECT functions

94) Match the following terms to their description.

I. Nested IF function II. IF function III. HLOOKUP function IV. IFS function V. IFNA function A) A function that only allows for one logical test B) A function that is used when the table of data is structured horizontally in rows C) A function that works just like the IFERROR function but only for #N/A errors D) A function that uses multiple IF functions inside one another to evaluate different conditions E) A function that allows you to test up to 127 different conditions, specifying a value if true for each with the option to also specify a default value to return if none of the conditions returns true Answer: D, A, B, E, C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Explore LOOKUP functions Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 6: Integrating Complex Functions into Business Analysis 1) All of the following statements are TRUE regarding raw data EXCEPT: A) Raw data may be numeric or text.

B) Raw data without context is meaningless to users.

C) Raw data inherently without modification provides insights for decision-making.

D) Raw data is unorganized.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

2)

is data that has context, meaning, and relevance.

A) Information B) Raw data C) A data element D) A variable set

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables 103 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

3) A(n) set is a collection of related data consisting of observational units, variables, and organized data.

A) information B) variable C) data D) field Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

4) Which of the following should NOT be performed in an effort to protect the integrity of data?

A) Keep a backup of the original data.

B) Always keep data and the analysis of that data on the same worksheet.

C) Check data for completeness and accuracy.

D) Organize data within a workbook in a meaningful and efficient manner.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

5) An Excel table can do all of the following EXCEPT: A) Automatically adjust table formatting and formula references B) Provide both flexibility and scalability C) Automatically sort data as new rows are added D) Help provide context to the user by organizing data in a meaningful way Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

6) Which of the following is a benefit of converting a range of data into an Excel table?

A) Automatic filtering and sorting tools are added.

B) The data becomes locked and cannot be edited.

C) Rows are automatically deleted if data is duplicated.

D) The table disables the use of conditional formatting.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables 104 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

7) To change a table back to a range of data, click group on the Table Design tab.

A) Convert to Data B) Convert to Range C) Convert to Information D) Convert to Cells

located in the Tools

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

8) Which of the following statements about filtering is NOT true?

A) Filtering makes it possible to view specific data.

B) The filtering function can be applied to only one data set on a worksheet.

C) Filters can only be used if the data is formatted as an Excel table.

D) Filtering enables a user to examine and analyze a subset of records.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

9) The filter displays the values in the field that can be toggled on and off through the use of check boxes.

A) advanced B) enhanced C) standard D) additional Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

10) When using the the same worksheet.

A) Advanced B) Enhanced C) Standard D) Additional

Filter feature in Excel, filtering criteria will be listed on

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables 105 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

11) Click in the Sort & Filter group on the Data tab to remove any existing filters that have been applied to a data set on the Excel worksheet.

A) Delete B) Clear C) Remove D) Cancel Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

12) A is a visual control that is used to quickly filter data in an Excel table.

A) slicer B) grouping variable C) summary variable D) structured reference Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

13) Pressing and holding A) Alt B) Ctrl + Alt C) Ctrl D) Ctrl + Shift

allows you to select multiple criteria on a slicer.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

14) The function will run calculations only on data that is in a subset when a filter is applied.

A) SUM B) TOTAL C) SUBTOTAL D) SUMMARY Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables 106 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

15) All of the following statements are TRUE regarding the function_num argument of the SUBTOTAL function EXCEPT: A) The function_num argument specifies which type of calculation, such as SUM or AVERAGE, should be performed on the subset of records.

B) One set of function_num values will include both filtered and hidden data.

C) One set of function_num values will include only filtered data.

D) One set of function_num values will include only hidden data.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

16) Which of the following functions is NOT available as an option when selecting the first argument in the SUBTOTAL function?

A) IF B) SUM C) AVERAGE D) COUNT Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

17) The function is an array function that allows you to easily filter a range of data based on criteria that you define.

A) SUBTOTAL B) FILTER C) IF D) TOTAL Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Use the FILTER function to retrieve records

18) All of the following statements are TRUE about an Excel database EXCEPT: A) An Excel database stores data in records (rows) and fields (columns).

B) Each record in a database represents a collection of related data in a single row.

C) All database functions are named using the format D XXX() where X XX is the name of the similar nondatabase Excel function.

D) All database functions include the exact same four arguments.

Answer: D 107 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Construct database functions

19) The function is a database function that adds the numbers in a field (column) of records in the database that match conditions you specify.

A) DBSUM B) DATASUM C) DSUM D) DTSUM Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Construct database functions

20) All of the following statements are TRUE about the DSUM function EXCEPT: A) An advantage of using the DSUM function is that you can view and adjust the criteria on the worksheet, making the calculation more transparent.

B) The DSUM function is a database function that is ideal for setting up a criteria range and then calculating the sum based on the filters within that criteria range.

C) The criteria can be modified on the worksheet and the result is updated automatically.

D) The syntax of the DSUM function is  DSUM( field,database,(criteria)) where the criteria argument is optional.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Construct database functions

21)

are interactive tables that extract, organize, and summarize source data.

A) DataTables B) PivotTables C) ValueTables D) VariableTables

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

22) Which of following is NOT a benefit of using PivotTables? the

108 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) PivotTables are useful when working with a huge table of data.

B) PivotTables are useful when looking for trends.

C) PivotTables are useful for summarizing data.

D) PivotTables are useful for editing and modifying the original dataset directly.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

23) All of the following statements are TRUE regarding PivotTables EXCEPT: A) PivotTables automatically update when changes are made to the underlying data.

B) Prior to creating a PivotTable, any desired calculated fields should be added.

C) PivotTables can be created on a new worksheet or an existing worksheet.

D) PivotTables automatically expand and contract on a worksheet as variables are added, removed, or rearranged.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

24) Which of the following is a key advantage of using a PivotTable?

A) It allows you to easily summarize large amounts of data and dynamically explore different views.

B) It enables you to permanently delete data directly from the original dataset.

C) It is the best tool for editing individual data records.

D) It automatically identifies and corrects data errors in the source data.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

25) Which of the following is NOT an area in the Fields area?

A) Columns B) List C) Filters D) Rows Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables 109 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

26)

variables are fields within a data set that can be used to categorize data for comparison.

A) Aggregate B) Category C) Grouping D) Summary

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

27)

variables are data that can be aggregated.

A) Aggregate B) Category C) Grouping D) Summary

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

28) type and dates are two examples of fields that could be used for PivotTable variables.

A) aggregate B) category C) grouping D) summary Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

29) Exam scores, quantity, and price are three examples of PivotTable variables.

A) aggregate B) category C) grouping D) summary Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables 110 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

30) All of the following statements are TRUE regarding grouping in PivotTables EXCEPT: A) Grouping variables are placed along the top or the left side of the PivotTable.

B) The summary variables are positioned in the Values area below the PivotTable Fields list.

C) Grouping variables cannot be modified after the PivotTable is created.

D) Dates are useful for grouping into months, quarters, and years to explore trends over time.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

31) When creating a PivotTable, fields from the PivotTable Fields list can be dragged and dropped to each of the following quadrant areas EXCEPT: A) Columns B) Rows C) Values D) Variables Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

32) Which of the following statements is FALSE about using calculated fields in a PivotTable?

A) Calculated fields can be used to perform custom calculations within the PivotTable.

B) Calculated fields are added directly to the source data.

C) Calculated fields can include mathematical operations, such as addition or multiplication.

D) Calculated fields are displayed in the Values area of the PivotTable.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

33) Which of the following statements regarding PivotTables is NOT true?

A) When there are a lot of groups within a field, it is better to put those fields along the row side of the PivotTable.

B) PivotTables can only summarize numeric data, not text-based data.

C) Typically, the contents of a PivotTable should go down more than across.

111 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) Fields for PivotTable grouping could be all in the Rows area, all in the Columns area, or a mixture.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

34) PivotTable data formatted in the within the same field.

A) Value Field Settings B) Format Data C) Data Settings D) Format Fields Answer: A

dialog box applies to all other cells

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

35) It is not recommended to use the standard formatting techniques found on the tab with PivotTables.

A) Home B) Insert C) Design D) Layout Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

36) In Excel pivot tables, which of the following describes the purpose of grouping variables?

A) It allows you to summarize numeric data into ranges and dates into time periods like months or quarters B) It allows you to filter data based on multiple conditions simultaneously C) It allows you to merge duplicate values in your dataset D) It allows you to sort data in ascending or descending order Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

112 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

37) Which of the following best describes an advantage of using PivotTable Styles?

A) The formatting can only be applied to specific cells in the PivotTable.

B) The formatting must be manually reapplied when new data is added.

C) The formatting automatically updates when the PivotTable data is refreshed or expanded.

D) The formatting is limited to a single-color scheme.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

38) A A) selector B) sifter C) slicer D) strainer

is a visual mechanism for quickly filtering data in a PivotTable.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

39)

allows a user to import up to one million rows of data from multiple sources, such as large corporate databases, public data feeds, spreadsheets, and text files onto your computer.

A) A PivotTable B) A PivotChart C) A slicer D) Power Pivot

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

40) By default, PivotTables show a(n) A) grand total B) count C) average D) subtotal

for both columns and rows.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables 113 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

41)

allows a user to select an individual piece of data in a PivotTable and then create a copy on another worksheet of the individual records that were used to get that summary data.

A) A PivotChart Data connection B) Data linking C) Drilling down D) Content relating

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

42) All the following statements are TRUE regarding PivotCharts EXCEPT: A. Once a PivotChart is created, all formatting elements from a regular chart are no longer available.

B. When the PivotTable data are rearranged, they are automatically updated in the PivotChart.

C. When making changes to the PivotChart, the corresponding changes are seen in the PivotTable.

D. PivotCharts provide a visual representation of the data in a PivotTable. of

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Develop and customize PivotCharts

43) All of the following statements are TRUE regarding PivotTable and PivotChart best practices EXCEPT: A) Format the PivotTable or PivotChart so it is easy to read and your audience understands what it is you are trying to communicate.

B) Once you have selected your data, ensure the source data are arranged in an area with column headings representing each field and the rows representing each record.

C) Always use the default layout without customizing fields to improve clarity for your audience.

D) Know who your audience is before you develop your PivotTable or PivotChart. It could make a difference in how much detail you display.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Develop and customize PivotCharts

44) Raw data without context is of minimal value to users.

114 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

45) If a set of data is not organized, it is difficult to transform the data into information.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

46) Raw data such as a single temperature reading is very valuable for decision making.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

47) Adding new columns and rows in a table requires users to manually adjust formula references within that table.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

48) Excel allows table names to include spaces and special characters.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

49) When adding columns and records to an Excel table, Excel automatically adjusts the named ranges that are associated with the table to include the new records.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

50) As columns or rows are added to a table formatted with a banded style, the new columns and rows are automatically formatted to match the banded style.

Answer: TRUE 115 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

51) After a table has been converted back to data, the converted data still possesses table functionality.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

52) A filter is a standard part of an Excel table.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

53) When working with multiple data sets that need to be filtered, it is best to ensure that each data set has its own unique headers for effective filtering.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

54) The filtering feature in Excel is great for spur-of-the-moment exploration of data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

55) Advanced Filter in Excel provides AND and OR features to join multiple criteria.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

56) If the criteria range for the Advanced Filter includes a row with no criteria, the entire record set will be returned because nothing is constraining the records.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 116 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

57) You must select an entire row in your data table in order to insert a slicer.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

58) Slicers can be used to filter data in Excel tables.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

59) Pressing Shift allows you to select multiple criteria on a slicer.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

60) Standard functions automatically adjust their calculations to exclude filtered-out data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

61) Functions like SUM or AVERAGE aggregate an entire set of data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

62) When using the SUBTOTAL function, entering a number from 1 to 10 in the SUBTOTAL function's first argument will result in the filtered only data being used.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables 117 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

63) Using Excel's Hide Rows command is a required feature when filtering data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

64) Any records that should not be used in SUBTOTAL calculations should be excluded using the filtering process.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

65) When using function numbers 1-11, the SUBTOTAL function excludes rows hidden by filters from its calculations.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

66) The FILTER function is used to calculate aggregate values like sums or averages directly within a filtered range.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Use the FILTER function to retrieve records

67) When using database functions, all the criteria must be evaluated to TRUE for the record to be included in the calculation.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Construct database functions

68) When creating a PivotTable, any existing automatic subtotals or other summary functions at the bottom of the data should be removed.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables 118 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

69) It is better to use a PivotTable for multiple purposes than to create several individual PivotTables.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

70) Numerical data placed into the Values area of a PivotTable will be summed by default.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

71) If there are a lot of groups within a field, it is better to put those fields across the top in the columns of a PivotTable instead of along the row side.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

72) It is recommended to use the standard formatting techniques found on the Home tab with PivotTables.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

73) After making changes to a source data set, PivotTable data should be refreshed to update the changes in the PivotTable.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

74) When PivotTable data are rearranged, corresponding changes are automatically made in the PivotChart.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Develop and customize PivotCharts 119 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

75) Format the PivotTable or PivotChart so it is easy to read and your audience understands what it is you are trying to communicate.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Develop and customize PivotCharts

76)

data refers to unprocessed information that has not been organized or given context, making it less useful on its own.

Answer: Raw Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

77) is by users when they organize data in a meaningful context.

Answer: Information created

Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

78) A(n) set is a collection of related data consisting of observational units, variables, and organized data.

Answer: data Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

79) A table defaults to a table style that has data across rows.

Answer: banded

rows, making it easier to read

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

80) The Convert to option, located on the Table Design tab, allows a table to be returned to its original data range, removing all table-specific functionality.

Answer: Range Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables 120 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

81)

is a process of hiding records that do not meet specified criteria in a

data set.

Answer: Filtering Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

82) The Answer: standard

filter the values in the field that can be toggled on and off. displays

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

83) The Filter feature requires filtering criteria to be set up in specific cells and follow a specific format.

Answer: Advanced Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

84) When Advanced Filter is applied, the headings in the table.

Answer: filter arrow

buttons disappear from the field

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

85) Pressing Answer: Ctrl

allows you to select multiple criteria on a slicer.

Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

86) To data means to consolidate or summarize data using functions such as SUM and AVERAGE. Answer: aggregate Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

121 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

87) When filtering data, records that are on hidden rows will not automatically be used in the calculation of the function.

Answer: SUBTOTAL Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use filters and the SUBTOTAL function in tables

88) The function is a dynamic array function that allows you to easily filter a range of data based on criteria that you define.

Answer: FILTER Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Use the FILTER function to retrieve records

89) While it is possible to create multiple PivotTables from the same data set, only PivotTable(s) is/are allowed per worksheet.

Answer: one Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

90) A PivotTable can be created on a new or an existing Answer: worksheet

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

91)

variables can be thought of as any field within a data set that can be used to categorize data for comparison.

Answer: Grouping Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

92) The Answer: Design

tab on the appearance aspects of designing a PivotTable. focus es

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

122 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

93) The PivotTable Answer: Analyze

tab has all the options for fine-tuning the PivotTable.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

94) It is not recommended to use the Home tab with PivotTables.

Answer: standard

formatting techniques found on the

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

95) The Answer: Filter

field should give a big-picture perspective of the data.

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

96) A(n) is a visual control that provides the user with buttons that can be used to quickly filter data in a table, PivotChart, or PivotTable.

Answer: slicer Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

97)

allows a user to import up to one million rows of data from multiple sources, such as large corporate databases, public data feeds, spreadsheets, and text files onto your computer.

Answer: Power Pivot Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables

98)

is a for accessing the detailed records that were used in a PivotTable to get to the aggregated data.

Answer: Drilling down method

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables 123 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

99) are charts are tied to the data within a PivotTable.

Answer: PivotCharts that

Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Develop and customize PivotCharts

100)

the following terms to their description.

h

I. Raw data II. Information III. Data set IV. Filtering V. Aggregate A) Collection of related data consisting of observational units, variables, and organized data B) A process of hiding records that do not meet specified criteria in a data set C) Data that has context, meaning, and relevance D) To consolidate or summarize E) Elements or facts that may or may not have meaning or relevance Answer: E, C, A, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with data and information in tables

101) Match following terms to their description. the

I. PivotTables II. Grouping variables III. Summary variables IV. Slicer V. Drilling down A) A method for accessing detailed records used in a PivotTable to get to the aggregated data B) Interactive tables that extract, organize, and summarize data C) A visual mechanism for quickly filtering data in a PivotTable D) Data that is not categorical in nature and is likely to be used for summarization E) Any fields within a data set that can be used to categorize or group for comparison Answer: B, E, D, C, A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Develop and customize PivotTables Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 7: Multiple Worksheets, Workbooks, and Templates 124 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

1) Which of the following can you do with multiple worksheets in Excel?

A) Format multiple worksheets simultaneously when grouped.

B) Reference data across worksheets in formulas.

C) Fill formulas across worksheets when grouped.

D) All of the above.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

2)

worksheets allows users to enter data on multiple worksheets at one time.

A) Linking B) Grouping C) Bridging D) Merging

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

3) To group contiguous worksheet tabs, click on the first worksheet tab, press and hold , and then click on the last worksheet tab.

A) Home B) Alt C) F4 D) Shift Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

4) To ungroup worksheets, right-click a grouped worksheet tab and select Ungroup Sheets from the .

A) shortcut menu B) command menu C) task menu D) options menu Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Group worksheets 125 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

5) Which of the following features is NOT available when worksheets with similar structure are grouped?

A) Applying table formatting B) Entering formulas C) Sorting data D) Entering row headings Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

6) The command will only replicate cell contents or formats to the same cell locations in different worksheets.

A) Copy Formatting B) Fill Across Worksheets C) Fill Contents D) Fill All Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

7) Ribbon tools that are not available when worksheets are grouped will be .

A) grayed out B) highlighted C) underlined D) italicized Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

8) Which of the following statements about the Fill Across Worksheets command is TRUE? A) It can be used to apply both cell contents and formats to all grouped worksheets.

B) It can copy cell contents to different locations across multiple worksheets.

C) It allows copying data from one grouped worksheet to ungrouped worksheets.

D) It automatically fills values from a source worksheet to only visible worksheets in a group.

Answer: A 126 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

9) Data can be copied from a single worksheet into grouped A) functions B) cells C) workbooks D) worksheets

.

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

10) Which Excel feature is available when worksheets are grouped?

A) Sparklines B) Charts C) Functions D) Shapes Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

11) Which scenario is most suitable for using the Fill Across Worksheets feature?

A) You need to copy cell content from one location to different, non-corresponding locations in multiple worksheets.

B) You want to apply the same formula to the same cell range across all grouped worksheets.

C) You need to copy conditional formatting across grouped worksheets.

D) You want to copy data only to the visible cells across grouped worksheets.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

12) Fill Across Worksheets should be used when the target worksheets contain contents the user does not want to overwrite.

A) Styles B) Layouts C) Formats 127 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) Setups Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

13) A worksheets.

A) category B) summary C) formula D) reference

worksheet can be used to consolidate data from multiple

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

14) The two ways worksheet data can be consolidated are A) consolidate by category or consolidate by type B) consolidate by type or consolidate by position C) consolidate by position or consolidate by group D) consolidate by category or consolidate by position

.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

15) If you want to summarize data from multiple places and want to arrange the data in all the worksheets in identical order and location, you would use the option.

A) consolidate by category B) consolidate by formula C) PivotTable report D) consolidate by position Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

16) To summarize data using matching row and column labels across worksheets, you would use the option.

128 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) consolidate by position B) consolidate by formula C) consolidate by category D) PivotTable report Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

17) To summarize data using formulas and 3-D references without consistent position or categories, you would use the option.

A) consolidate by formula B) consolidate by position C) consolidate by category D) PivotTable report Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

18) A 3-D reference has the following structure: A) =worksheet name?cell reference B) ="worksheet name!cell reference" C) =worksheet name!cell reference D) ='worksheet name!'cell reference

.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

19) References that address data across multiple worksheets are called references.

A) 3-D B) multi-content C) composite D) compound Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

129 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

20) What is the correct way to create a 3-D named range that spans multiple worksheets?

A) Type the range name in the Name Box B) Right-click the selected cells and choose Define Name C) Use the Define Name command in the Defined Names group on the Formulas tab D) Use the Create from Selection command on the Formulas tab Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

21) Which of the following is TRUE about 3-D named ranges?

A) They can reference cells across multiple worksheets.

B) They cannot include blank cells.

C) They are limited to a single worksheet.

D) They do not allow the use of formulas.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

22) What is a key limitation when creating a data consolidation in a worksheet?

A) Only one consolidation can be created per worksheet.

B) Consolidation cannot include data from grouped worksheets.

C) Consolidation requires identical worksheet tab colors.

D) Consolidation cannot use formulas.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

23) A primary advantage to referencing data in multiple workbooks is that data can .

A) be copied and transmitted to anyone, anywhere B) be accessed directly at its original location C) be referenced through 2-D formulas D) be used by master workbooks Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks 130 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

24) Excel addresses linked workbooks by using A) relative B) absolute C) comparative D) bound

addresses.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks

25) When opening a linked workbook, users are given the choice whether to update .

A) changes B) links C) formulas D) data Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks

26)

allows multiple users to work on the same workbook at the same time.

A) Co-authoring B) Merging C) Automation D) Tracking

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Collaborate using multiple workbooks

27) Which of the following is a key feature of Excel's co-authoring capability?

A) Only one user can edit a workbook at a time.

B) Multiple users can edit a workbook simultaneously, with changes reflected in real-time.

C) Users must email the workbook to collaborators for their changes.

D) Workbook changes are only visible after saving and reopening the file.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Collaborate using multiple workbooks 131 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

28) An Excel similar workbooks.

A) template B) pattern C) master D) outline

is a workbook that provides a starting point for building other

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Use templates

29) A template provides A) contributions B) consistent structure C) coherent final formats D) personal data

such as column headings and data labels.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use templates

30) Which of the following is a primary benefit of using a template in Excel?

A) It prevents any edits to the workbook.

B) It automatically shares data with other users.

C) It limits the type of data that can be entered.

D) It ensures consistent structure and format across similar workbooks.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use templates

31) The A) .xlst B) .xlt x C) .xlt D) .xltp

extension is used for an Excel template.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Use templates

132 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

32) Before saving an existing workbook as a template, A) remove any specific data B) leave the workbook in its original form C) share the workbook D) enable workbook protection

.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create templates from an existing workbook

33) Multiple worksheets can be selected at the same time.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

34) Conditional formatting is an Excel feature that can be used when worksheets are grouped.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

35) Entering information into grouped worksheets is a very efficient way to modify a workbook.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

36) Ungrouping worksheets is accomplished by clicking the Group tag on the title bar.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

37) When worksheets are grouped, what you do to one worksheet happens to the other worksheets in the group.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 133 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 1. Group worksheets

38) To enter formulas in worksheets, the worksheets cannot be grouped.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

39) Fill Across Worksheets can be used to fill by contents or formats, but not both at the same time.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

40) Any ribbon tools that are NOT available when worksheets are grouped will be blacked out.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

41) A 2-D named range references the same cell or range of cells across multiple worksheets in a workbook.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

42) When consolidating data with links to the source data, the consolidated result includes references to the original cells in other worksheets.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

43) To arrange the data in all the worksheets in identical order and location use the consolidate by position option.

Answer: TRUE 134 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

44) To organize the data differently than how it is presented in the separate worksheets while using the same row and column labels so the consolidated worksheet matches the data, use the consolidate by category option.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

45) A 3-D reference allows formulas and functions to use data from cells and cell ranges across worksheets.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

46) A 3-D reference on a worksheet named Summary to cell A1 in a worksheet named ‗Sales Data‘ has the following structure: ='Sales Data'!A1 Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

47) A 3-D named range can be defined in the Name Box. Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

48) When you have data on multiple worksheets and want to consolidate that data into a summary worksheet, you can use a 2-D formula.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

49) When data is consolidated and links to the source data are included, the 135 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

consolidation will be automatically updated when changes are made to the source data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

50) A primary advantage of referencing data in multiple workbooks is that you can access data at its source in its original location.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks

51) If one workbook is moved after a link between two workbooks is created, the connection will still work since Excel uses relative addressing.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks

52) Links to workbooks are easily broken, especially if files are moved or deleted.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks

53) While VLOOKUP can reference linked table data in another workbook, it cannot do so unless the workbook that contains the table is closed.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks

54) Excel's co-authoring feature only allows one user to edit a workbook at a time, and changes are only visible after the workbook is saved and reopened.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Collaborate using multiple workbooks 136 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

55) A template is a special file type that identifies multiple workbooks and remembers the manner in which the workbooks should be arranged.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use templates

56) Any workbook can be used as a template for another workbook by simply opening that workbook and saving it with the template file extension.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Use templates

57) The Excel template file extension is .xltmp.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Use templates

58) Built-in templates can provide pre-designed formats and data labels to speed up the creation of commonly used workbooks.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use templates

59) Data entry and formatting can be applied simultaneously to worksheets, greatly increasing efficiency.

Answer: grouped Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

60) The command can be used to copy cell contents, formats, or both contents and formats to worksheets in a group.

Answer: Fill Across Worksheets Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Group worksheets 137 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

61) When pasting data into grouped worksheets, the pasted range must not with the copied range.

Answer: overlap Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

62) Any ribbon tools that are not available when worksheets are grouped will be .

Answer: grayed out Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Group worksheets

63) Filling formats across should be used when the user does not want to overwrite content on the target worksheet.

Answer: worksheets Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

64) A 3-D reference in Excel allows a formula to use data from multiple within a workbook.

Answer: worksheets Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

65) When creating a 3-D named range that spans multiple worksheets, you must use the command on the Formulas tab.

Answer: Define Name Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

66) A worksheet can store only Answer: one

consolidation(s).

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets 138 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

67) Consolidating by category is more flexible than consolidating by Answer: position

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

68) The Consolidate feature cannot create the consolidation.

Answer: links

to the worksheet that contains

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

69)

references allow formulas and functions to use data from cells and cell ranges across worksheets.

Answer: Three-dimensional, 3-D Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

70) The correct 3-D reference used to specify cell range B2 through B25 in the SalesData worksheet is .

Answer: =SalesData!B2:B25 Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

71) Consolidate by can be used to create a summary worksheet when the source worksheets all have an identical structure.

Answer: position Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

72) A primary advantage of referencing data in multiple workbooks is that you can access data at its source, in its location.

Answer: original Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks 139 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

73) It is considered good practice to store all workbooks in a linked relationship together in the same .

Answer: folder Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks

74) Excel addresses linked workbooks by using Answer: absolute

addresses.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks

75) When Excel displays in a cell, this generally means that the reference to a value could not be found, such as a matching result in a VLOOKUP function.

Answer: #REF! Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Work with and link multiple workbooks

76) An Excel similar workbooks.

Answer: template

is a workbook that provides a starting point for building other

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use templates

77) An Excel template is saved with the Answer: .xltx or xltx

extension.

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use templates

78)

templates are stored in the Program Files\Microsoft Office\root\T Templates\1033 folder where 1033 is the language I D for English (US).

Answer: Local Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use templates

140 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

79) Microsoft, through its template site at Office.com, fosters a(n) users who download templates posted by other users.

Answer: community

of Office

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use templates

80) Templates are generally used to create worksheets or workbooks with consistent and format.

Answer: structure Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create templates from an existing workbook

81) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Group II. 3-D references III. Shift IV. Conditional formatting V. Data tab A) Cannot be directly applied to grouped worksheets B) Key used to group contiguous worksheets C) These contents are not available to grouped worksheets D) Multiple worksheets selected at the same time E) Can be used to reference data between worksheets Answer: D, E, B, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

82) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Name Box arrow II. Fill Across Worksheets III. Worksheet IV. Multiple worksheets in a workbook V. 3-D named range A) Used to list all tables and range names B) A two-dimensional array C) References the same cell or range of cells across multiple worksheets in a workbook D) Command used to copy cell contents, formats, or contents and formats to grouped worksheets 141 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

E) A three-dimensional array Answer: A, D, B, E, C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create summary worksheets

83) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Consolidate by position II. Consolidate by category III. Online template IV. Template V. Built-in template A) Template that can be downloaded to your hard drive B) Workbook that provides a starting point for building other similar workbooks C) Aggregates relative data in the same position in multiple worksheets D) Template provided with the installation of Microsoft Office E) Aggregates data in cells with matching row and/or column labels Answer: C, E, A, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create templates from an existing workbook Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 8: Building an Application with Multiple Worksheets and Workbooks 1) Which of the following statements is FALSE? A) Tracing formulas draws lines from a formula to cells that supply source data.

B) Formula auditing tools show you which cells are used in a formula.

C) Excel automatically removes all trace arrows once a precedent cell is modified.

D) Both tracing a formula and evaluating a formula are useful in understanding how a worksheet is structured.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. View formula precedents and dependents

2) Which of the following is NOT a formula auditing tool?

A) Trace Precedents B) Trace Dependents C) Evaluate Relationships D) Evaluate Formula Answer: C 142 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. View formula precedents and dependents

3) Which of the following is NOT an option in the Formula Auditing group on the Formulas tab?

A) Trace Precedents B) Evaluate Formula C) Trace Dependents D) Calculation Options Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 1. View formula precedents and dependents

4) The A) Evaluate B) Analyze C) Review D) Interpret

Formula tool shows exactly how a formula works.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Evaluate formulas

5) To select all cells that contain a formula, press and select Formulas.

A) Alt + Ctrl + Enter B) Ctrl + F C) Alt + Ctrl + Shift D) Ctrl + G

and then click Special

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Evaluate formulas

6) A reference is a single formula that references itself or multiple formulas that reference each other.

A) self B) circular C) duplicate 143 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) matching Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Correct circular references

7) The Excel Window feature is useful when you want to monitor the effect of changes to values in other worksheets or workbooks.

A) Trace B) Audit C) Watch D) Evaluate Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Watch Window

8) All of the following statements are TRUE about the Watch Window EXCEPT: A) As soon as the workbook is closed, any cells in that workbook that are being watched are removed from the Watch Window.

B) The Watch Window makes it possible to monitor cells the user considers important in a separate window.

C) The Watch Window is particularly useful when you want to monitor the effect of your changes to values in several other worksheets or workbooks.

D) The workbook that contains the watched cell must be closed and must remain closed.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use the Watch Window

9)

locks specific rows and/or columns of a worksheet in place.

A) Lock Rows B) Freeze Panes C) Protect Sheet D) Lock Cells

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Freeze worksheet panes

144 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

10) Data includes rules that determine what can and cannot be entered in specific cells.

A) authentication B) validation C) certification D) verification Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

11) Validation into a particular cell.

A) criteria B) conditions C) settings D) controls

are constraints that limit what worksheet users can enter

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

12) Which of the following statements about custom data validation rules is TRUE? A) Custom validation allows multiple criteria to be applied using formulas.

B) Custom validation can only restrict data to whole numbers.

C) Custom validation requires the use of predefined lists of values.

D) Custom validation cannot use logical functions like AND() or LEFT().

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

13)

validation presents the user with a list of data values from which the user can choose.

A) Directory B) Registry C) Index D) List

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation 145 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

14) Named ranges that are to be used as lists of values for data validation .

A) must be in the same workbook where the validation is applied B) must be in the same worksheet where the validation is applied C) must be in a different workbook than where the validation is applied D) must be in a different worksheet than where the validation is applied Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

15) All of the following statements are TRUE about data validation EXCEPT: A) Data validation rules can automatically correct invalid entries to match the allowed criteria.

B) Each of the validation criteria can be specified with an Input Message and/or an Error Alert.

C) In its simplest form, data validation restricts you to a single validation criteria per cell.

D) Custom validation can be used to apply multiple validation criteria to a cell.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

16) A(n) informs a user when entered data violates the validation constraints.

A) Input Message B) Error Alert C) list validation D) cell validation Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

17) A(n) appears when a validated cell is active, to provide information to the user before data is entered.

A) list validation B) Error Alert C) Input Message D) cell validation Answer: C 146 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

18)

validation is functionally identical to decimal validation with the exception that only integer values are valid.

A) Whole number B) Numeric C) Fractional D) Percentage

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

19) Which of the following is an example of when to use a time validation rule in Excel?

A) To ensure a value is selected from a predefined list of options.

B) To limit the number of text characters in a cell.

C) To restrict entries to specific times within business hours.

D) To validate that data contains only whole numbers.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

20) A data value is formed following a system of rules where the position of information is tied to its context.

A) restrictive B) conditional C) codified D) logical Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

21) All of the following statements are TRUE regarding data validation EXCEPT: A) Custom validation allows you to specify more complex criteria than allowed with other validation types.

B) Data validation is an excellent tool to use in workbooks where you want to restrict data entry.

147 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) At times, data validation rules can hinder data entry rather than enhance it.

D) Data validation prevents spelling errors.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

22)

validation allows users to apply multiple criteria simultaneously by using formulas.

A) Defined B) Personalized C) Custom D) Individualized

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

23)

length validation can prevent truncation when data entered into a worksheet will be imported into a database.

A) Data B) Input C) Text D) Value

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

24)

schemes consist of rules that combine data values in specific formats and locations to generate a new data value.

A) Codification B) Identification C) Merged D) Linked

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

25) The

feature of Excel can be used to manually validate data.

148 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) value-to-speech B) text-to-speech C) input-to-speech D) item-to-speech Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

26) A in Excel is a recording of keystrokes and mouse clicks performed to complete a task.

A) sparkline B) callout C) macro D) hyperlink Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

27) A Location is a folder that has been identified in the Microsoft Office Trust Center as a safe location from which to open files that contain active code.

A) Protected B) Secured C) Locked D) Trusted Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

28) Which of the following is allowed by the Microsoft Office Trust Center if a file's location is NOT a Trusted Location?

A) Formulas B) Macros C) Controls D) Scripts Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Create and use macros 149 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

29) Which of the following statements is FALSE? A) Recording macros is generally considered an activity for worksheet developers.

B) As with cell references in formulas, cell references in macros can be absolute or relative.

C) The effects of a macro can be reversed by using the Undo command.

D) Macros are recorded with absolute references by default.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

30) A(n) macro is run.

A) specific B) absolute C) fixed D) secured

macro reference affects the same cell address every time the

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

31) The actual cells referenced by a macro is run.

A) linked B) joined C) relative D) merged Answer: C

macro are not determined until the

Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

32) Using navigational aids such as in a workbook can make the workbook much more usable and easier to understand.

A) hyperlinks B) groupings C) joins D) networks Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Change how to navigate a workbook 150 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

33) All of the following statements are TRUE about hiding and unhiding worksheet tabs EXCEPT: A) To unhide a worksheet, right-click any worksheet tab, select Unhide, select the name of the hidden worksheet, and click OK. B) When you hide a worksheet, hyperlinks to that worksheet will still work.

C) Hiding worksheet tabs will affect the entire workbook.

D) Once you hide the tabs, you have to show them again to continue navigating to individual worksheets.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Change how to navigate a workbook

34) What effect does hiding the horizontal scroll bar have on the usability of a workbook?

A) It prevents users from scrolling to view columns that are off-screen.

B) It locks the column width settings of the worksheet.

C) It hides the first column of the worksheet.

D) It restricts navigation to only visible rows.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Change how to navigate a workbook

35) Which of the following statements is FALSE? A) Hiding horizontal and vertical scroll bars is an all or nothing option.

B) Some navigation options are for the whole workbook while some are for individual worksheets.

C) You should always consider how the navigation options will affect each worksheet and the user experience.

D) Scroll bars are hidden or shown at the workbook level, so you should ensure all worksheets can still be navigated effectively.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Change how to navigate a workbook

36) Which of the following statements is FALSE? A) Gridlines are used to divide one worksheet cell from another.

B) Gridlines should always remain visible except in very rare instances.

C) Gridlines are very helpful during the development of a worksheet.

D) Gridlines lend visual structure to a worksheet.

Answer: B 151 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Change how to navigate a workbook

37) All of the following statements are TRUE about protecting workbooks and worksheets EXCEPT: A) Excel allows the protection of applications at the workbook and worksheet level.

B) Worksheet-level protection controls the type of editing allowed in the worksheet.

C) Workbook-level protection controls who has access to the workbook.

D) Worksheet protection can be applied to all worksheets in a workbook simultaneously.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Protect workbooks and worksheets

38) By default, only the options are selected when the worksheet is protected.

A) Delete rows and Delete columns B) Format rows and Format columns C) Select locked cells and Select unlocked cells D) Edit objects and Format cells Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Protect workbooks and worksheets

39) Which of the following best describes the purpose of workbook-level protection in Excel?

A) To restrict editing to specific cells within a worksheet.

B) To protect the overall structure of the workbook, such as adding or deleting worksheets.

C) To prevent unauthorized users from viewing specific cells.

D) To control the formatting options for individual worksheets.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Protect workbooks and worksheets

40)

is a method of protecting a workbook by assigning a password that unscrambles the code once it has been opened.

152 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) Encryption B) A macro C) Cyphering D) A translator Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Protect workbooks and worksheets

41) A precedent cell is a cell that depends on the value of the active cell.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. View formula precedents and dependents

42) When you choose to trace dependents and trace precedents, Excel puts arrows on the workbook to show you how the formula in the cell is constructed.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. View formula precedents and dependents

43) When a formula contains an error and the Trace Dependents tool has not helped you correct the problem, using the Review Functions tool is the next step.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Evaluate formulas

44) Circular references are always desirable in Excel formulas because they simplify calculations.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Correct circular references

45) To include a cell in the Watch Window, the workbook that contains the cell must be open and must remain open.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 153 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 4. Use the Watch Window

46) Freeze Panes locks specific rows and/or columns of a worksheet in place.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Freeze worksheet panes

47) Excel data validation can automatically correct invalid entries to match the allowed criteria.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

48) Using named ranges to identify source data for list validation makes worksheets easier to interpret.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

49) The Input Message and Error Alert for a data validation rule are required when creating the rule.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

50) Text length validation can be useful when data entered into a worksheet will be imported into a database.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

51) In cases where a codified data value cannot be adequately validated using a single range of values, custom data validation can be used.

Answer: TRUE 154 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

52) Codification schemes consist of rules that combine data values in specific formats and locations to generate a new data value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

53) Excel includes a text-to-speech feature that can assist you in manually validating data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

54) Excel files containing macros should be opened from a Trusted Location.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

55) Macros are recorded with relative references by default.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

56) Running a macro in Excel deletes the entire Undo history.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

57) Macros can be run from the Developer tab.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 155 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 7. Create and use macros

58) If you make a mistake when recording a macro, you can delete the macro and record a new one.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

59) Hiding worksheet tabs does not prevent navigation to other worksheets if hyperlinks to those worksheets exist.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Change how to navigate a workbook

60) In a well-designed worksheet, row and column headings often become unnecessary.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Change how to navigate a workbook

61) Freezing panes allows users to keep specific rows or columns visible while scrolling through the worksheet.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Change how to navigate a workbook

62) By default, all cells in a worksheet are unlocked.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Protect workbooks and worksheets

63) Workbook-level protection can be used to control the types of edits allowed within individual worksheets.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 156 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 9. Protect workbooks and worksheets

64) It is considered wise to protect your workbooks with both workbook-level and worksheet-level protection.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Protect workbooks and worksheets

65) Adding a password to an Excel workbook can protect the file structure, such as preventing adding or deleting sheets.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Protect workbooks and worksheets

66) A(n) Answer: precedent

cell is a cell that supplies a value to the formula in the active cell.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. View formula precedents and dependents

67) A(n) for its result.

Answer: dependent

cell is a cell whose value depends on the value in the active cell

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. View formula precedents and dependents

68) Tracing formulas draws lines with from a formula to cells that supply source data and to formulas that use the result of a formula.

Answer: arrows Diff: 3 Objective: 1. View formula precedents and dependents

69) The Formula tool shows you exactly how a formula executes so that you can compare actual execution to the way you know or think the formula should work.

Answer: Evaluate 157 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Evaluate formulas

70) To select all cells that contain a formula, press Ctrl + Special and select Formulas.

Answer: G

and then click

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Evaluate formulas

71) A(n) reference describes a single formula that references itself or multiple formulas that reference each other.

Answer: circular Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Correct circular references

72) The is an Excel feature that makes it possible to monitor cells the user considers important.

Answer: Watch Window Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use the Watch Window

73) To lock rows and/or columns and keep them visible when scrolling, use .

Answer: Freeze Panes Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Freeze worksheet panes

74)

includes rules that determine what can and cannot be entered in

specific cells.

Answer: Data validation Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

75)

criteria are constraints that limit what users can enter into a particular 158 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

cell.

Answer: Validation Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

76) The appears when a user makes a validated cell active and prompts a user before data is entered with information about data constraints.

Answer: Input Message Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

77) The Answer: Error Alert

informs a user when entered data violates validation constraints.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

78)

validation works very similar to decimal validation except the value entered must be a date that satisfies the specified criteria.

Answer: Date Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

79)

validation is similar to date validation with the only difference that data entered must be a time value.

Answer: Time Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

80)

validation is similar to decimal validation with the exception that only integer values are valid, and no decimals.

Answer: Whole number Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

159 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

81)

validation is generally used to limit the number of characters that can be entered into a cell.

Answer: Text length Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

82) The 40th room on floor 7 of a building being assigned room number 740 is a potential example of a(n) data value.

Answer: codified Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

83)

validation allows you to specify more complex criteria and permits multiple criteria simultaneously.

Answer: Custom Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

84)

schemes are rules that combine data values in specific formats and locations to generate a new data value.

Answer: Codification Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

85) The Excel feature enables manual validation of data, allowing you to hear as well as see what you entered.

Answer: text-to-speech Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

86) A(n) is a form of computer program that automates repetitive activities such as mouse clicks, keystrokes, and other worksheet interactions.

Answer: macro Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Create and use macros 160 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

87) If a workbook in a(n) be automatically enabled.

Answer: Trusted Location

is opened, macros contained in the document will

Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

88) The actual cells that a(n) the macro is run.

Answer: relative

macro references are not determined until

Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

89) Macros can be run from the Answer: Developer

tab or from a button added to a worksheet.

Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

90) When you record a macro, Excel converts your keystrokes and mouse clicks to commands.

Answer: Visual Basic for Applications, V BA Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create and use macros

91) A(n) Answer: hyperlink

opens another page or file when you click on it.

Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Change how to navigate a workbook

92)

are the vertical and horizontal lines on a worksheet that help define a cell's boundaries.

Answer: Gridlines Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Change how to navigate a workbook

161 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

93) Protecting the structure stops users from inserting, deleting, hiding, unhiding, and moving worksheets in a workbook.

Answer: workbook Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Protect workbooks and worksheets

94)

is a method of protecting a workbook by assigning a password that unscrambles the code once it has been opened.

Answer: Encryption Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Protect workbooks and worksheets

95) Match the following terms to their description.

I. Data validation II. List validation III. Decimal validation IV. Date validation V. Whole number validation A) Restricts users to entering data in a cell that contains digits and allows decimal places B) Tools that can help to ensure that data entry errors are kept to a minimum C) Restricts the user to entering integer values in a validated cell D) Presents a list of data values that the user can choose from E) Restricts the user to entering dates that satisfy the specified criteria in a validated cell Answer: B, D, A, E, C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

96) Match the following terms to their description.

I. List validation II. Custom validation III. Any value validation IV. Text length validation V. Codification scheme A) Consists of rules that combine data values in specific formats and locations to generate a new data value B) Limits the number of characters that can be entered into a cell C) Allows users to specify complex criteria and apply multiple criteria simultaneously 162 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) Uses the input message available through the data validation tools to communicate rules to enter data in a cell E) Allows users to select a value from a predefined list of values Answer: E, C, D, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Control data entry with data validation

97) Match the following terms to their description.

I. Formula auditing II. Circular reference III. Watch Window IV. Hyperlink V. Macro A) Describes a single formula that references itself or multiple formulas that reference each other B) Opens another page or file when you click on it C) Tools that show which cells are in a formula and how they are used D) A form of computer program that automates activities such as keystrokes and mouse clicks E) Excel feature that makes it possible to monitor cells the user considers important Answer: C, A, E, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create and use macros Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 9: Organize, Import, Export, and Cleanse Data Sets 1) Anything that is not stored in an Excel format (.xls or .xls x) is A) external data B) unimportant C) internal data D) information

.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

2) Which of the following is NOT a format that is a common data source for Excel?

A) .exe B) HTML C) XML 163 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) .accdb Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

3) One popular way to integrate information from the internet is to use a(n) .

A) different Microsoft product B) append query C) web query D) update query Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

4) Which of the following is a significant advantage of using external data connections in Excel for business intelligence?

A) It eliminates the need for any data transformation.

B) It allows dynamic updates to imported data when the source changes.

C) It guarantees that data from external sources is error-free.

D) It converts all data into Excel‘s default formats automatically.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

5) What is one significant advantage of using Get & Transform to connect to external data in Excel?

A) It automatically formats all data as an Excel table upon import.

B) It saves the transformation steps, allowing them to be reused when data is refreshed.

C) It removes the need to format dates before importing.

D) It only supports Excel file formats for data transformation.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

164 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

6) Which feature of Get & Transform allows you to combine data from multiple sources into a single dataset?

A) Append Queries B) Convert Text to Columns C) PivotTable Wizard D) Data Validation Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

7) HTML and XML are both examples of A) markup languages B) objects C) databases D) multimedia

.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

8)

is the standard for transmitting data between applications and systems.

A) A web query B) A text file C) XML D) Metadata

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

9)

is a web language that was created to tell the browser how to properly display a web page.

A) HTML B) XML C) VBA D) Query

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data 165 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

10)

is a markup language that was created to give structure to web page data so that it could be searched more efficiently.

A) HTML B) XML C) VBA D) Query

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

11)

markup indicators in an XML document used to identify the data.

A) Brackets B) Processors C) Parentheses D) Tags

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

12) An XML document uses itself.

A) maps B) markup C) schemas D) elements

that include start tags, end tags, and the data

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

13) <revenue> is an example of A) an HTML tag B) metadata C) an XML tag D) a delimiter

.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data 166 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

14) Which of the following is NOT true about text files?

A) Text files do not contain graphics.

B) Text files are also called A SCII files.

C) Text files contain formatting.

D) Text files may use delimiters to separate data.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

15) Which of the following is NOT a type of text file?

A) Tab delimited B) Comma separated C) Excel workbook D) Space delimited Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

16) In a tab delimited file, A) commas B) tabs C) spaces D) hyphens

separate the data.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

17)

is a way of indicating the beginning and end of a text data segment.

A) Metadata B) A delimiter C) A schema D) An element

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

167 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

18) The following is an example of the file format.

ProductNum,ProductName,DateShipped,Quantity 59313,XL Golf Shirts, 3 / 15 / 28,35 72316,Men's Shoe, 2 / 5 / 28,10 47423,Head covers, 3 / 6 / 28,20 A) tab delimited B) space delimited C) comma separated D) font delimited Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

19) The following is an example of the file format.

ProductNum ProductName DateShipped Quantity 59313 XL_Golf_Shirts 3_15_28 35 72316 Men's_Shoe 2_5_28 10 47423 Head_covers 3_6_28 20 A) tab delimited B) space delimited C) comma separated D) font delimited Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

20) What is a key benefit of using delimited text files, such as CSV or tab-delimited files, for importing data into Excel?

A) They support advanced formatting and embedded graphics.

B) They allow for the simple exchange of structured data across different systems.

C) They automatically validate the accuracy of the imported data.

D) They convert text data into an Excel-native format upon import.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

168 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

21)

data from a permanent connection can be imported as a simple table, a PivotTable report, or a PivotChart.

A) Formatted B) Unformatted C) Live D) Static

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Connect to an Access database

22) An Access database uses a A) primary key B) foreign key C) super key D) data key

field to uniquely identify a record.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Connect to an Access database

23) When a primary key field from one table is connected to a field in another table, the other field is said to be a key field.

A) primary B) foreign C) super D) secondary Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Connect to an Access database

24) A customer number is commonly used as a A) primary B) foreign C) super D) secondary

key.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Connect to an Access database 169 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

25) What is the primary advantage of connecting Excel to an Access database for importing data?

A) It ensures that all imported data is error-free and validated automatically.

B) It allows dynamic updates to imported data when the Access database is updated.

C) It converts all relational database tables into PivotTables automatically.

D) It eliminates the need for any data formatting in Excel after import.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Connect to an Access database

26) Which of the following statements is FALSE? A) Data cleansing is the process of fixing obvious errors in the data and converting the data into a useful format.

B) Data cleansing is not data verification.

C) Data verification is the process of validating that the data is correct and accurate.

D) Data cleansing is very costly both in time and money.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

27) Data obvious errors.

A) validation B) testing C) verification D) cleansing

is a process that converts data into a useful format by fixing

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

28) Data A) cleansing B) testing C) verification D) validation

is a process that validates data so that it is accurate.

Answer: C Diff: 2 170 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

29)

works by examining the pattern of data in the cell next to where you are typing.

A) Cleansing B) Flash Fill C) Validation D) Live data

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

30)

are functions that manipulate data to clean it up and make it useful.

A) Text functions B) Data functions C) Data verification D) Data cleansing

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

31) To change the text string luIS roDRIGueZ to Luis Rodriguez, use the function.

A) CLEAN B) PROPER C) TRIM D) CONVERT Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

32) To remove any nonprinting characters from a text string, use the function.

A) CLEAN B) PROPER C) TRIM D) FIND 171 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

33) To change the text string Aisha Khan to AISHA KHAN, use the function.

A) UPPER B) LOWER C) PROPER D) CONCAT Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

34) To remove all spaces from text except for single spaces between words, use the function.

A) CLEAN B) PROPER C) TRIM D) SUBSTITUTE Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

35) To change the word apple to orange in a string of text, use the function.

A) SUBSTITUTE B) PROPER C) CONCAT D) REPLACE Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

36) If cell A2 contains the text string "blue jeans small", which of the following formulas will return the word "blue"?

172 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) B) C)

 TEXTBEFORE  A2, " "   TEXTAFTER  A2, " "   LEN  A2 

 LEFT  A2, 4  D) Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

37) If cell A2 contains the string "laptop - 15 inch", which of the following formulas will return the text "15 inch"?

A) B) C)

 TEXTAFTER  A2, "  "   TEXTBEFORE  A2, "  "   LEN  A2 

 SEARCH  "15", A2  D) Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

38) If cell A1 contains the text string "Order12345Complete," which formula will extract the number "12345" from the middle of the string?

A) B) C)

 LEFT  A1, 5   MID  A1, 6, 5   TEXTAFTER  A1, "Order " 

 TEXTBEFORE  A1, "Complete"  D) Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

39) If cells A1 through A3 contain the text strings "Apple," "Banana," and "Cherry," respectively, which formula will combine them into the single string "Apple, Banana, Cherry" separated by commas?

A)

 CONCAT  A1: A3, ", "  173 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) C)

 TEXTJOIN  ", ", TRUE, A1: A3   JOIN  ", ", A1: A3 

 CONCATENATE  A1: A3  D) Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

40) The Wizard separates data from text files into their respective columns.

A) FIND B) REPLACE C) Data verification D) Convert Text to Columns Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Separate data using wizards

41) Which feature in Excel can be used to delete rows with duplicate values based on specific columns?

A) Remove Duplicates B) Data Validation C) Conditional Formatting D) Flash Fill Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Separate data using wizards

42) If cell A1 contains the date "07/15/2028," which formula will display it as "Saturday"?  TEXT  A1, "MM / DD / YYYY "  A)  TEXT  A1, " dddd"  B)  DATE  A1, "Day "  C)  FORMAT  A1, "DDDD"  D) Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective 7: Cleanse date-related data 174 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

43) Which function can calculate the number of working days (excluding weekends) between two dates?

A) WORKDAY B) NETWORKDAYS C) DAY D) WEEKNUM Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective 7: Cleanse date-related data

44) Most organizations keep their information in one single data source.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

45) Anything that is not stored in an Excel format or not stored locally is considered to be an external data set.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

46) Get & Transform in Excel can only connect to locally stored Excel files and cannot access online data sources such as SharePoint or Dynamics 365.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

47) Excel import file types are limited to only two types of files, HTML and XML. Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

48) One popular way to integrate information from web pages is to use a Data Connection Wizard.

Answer: FALSE 175 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

49) HTML describes the content of the data between tags.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

50) Unlike HTML, XML allows users to define their own custom tags to describe specific content.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

51) With XML, the content, format, and structure are contained in a single document.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

52) Text files have no metadata associated with them.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

53) A delimiter is a way of indicating the beginning and end of a text data segment.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

54) Text files are imported into Excel in a similar manner as XML and HTML files.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data 176 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

55) Commas are the only delimiter allowed for text files.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

56) Most people prefer to use Access over Excel to chart and analyze data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Connect to an Access database

57) Excel cannot connect to an Access database; rather, data must be copied and pasted into a spreadsheet.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Connect to an Access database

58) Flash Fill recognizes patterns in data as you type and automatically fills in values for text and numeric data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

59) Data cleansing is the process of validating that the data is correct and accurate.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

60) Text functions help to extract and standardize data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

61) The PROPER function in Excel can be used to convert all text in a cell to uppercase.

Answer: FALSE 177 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

62) The TRIM function removes all spaces from a text string, including all spaces between words.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

63) The TEXTBEFORE function can extract all text before a specified delimiter in a string.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

64) The TEXTAFTER function can only extract text from the beginning of a string.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

65) The MID function in Excel extracts a substring from a string based on a starting position and a specified number of characters.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

66) The TEXTJOIN function can combine text strings from multiple cells, separated by a specified delimiter.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

67) Conditional formatting can aid in removing duplicate data.

Answer: TRUE 178 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Separate data using wizards

68) The NETWORKDAYS function includes weekends as working days by default.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Cleanse date-related data

69) The TEXT function can be used to remove nonprinting characters from a string in Excel.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Cleanse date-related data

70) Excel users can import data from a variety of sources including is anything that is neither stored in an Excel format nor stored locally.

Answer: external data

, which

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

71) The feature in Get & Transform can split a single column of data into multiple columns based on a specified delimiter.

Answer: Split Column Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

72) With industry.

Answer: XML

, you can customize tags for use with content of a specific

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

73) A(n) document is saved as an .xsd file.

Answer: XML schema 179 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

74) A(n) Answer: text file

is a file structured by the use of delimiters.

Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

75) A(n) Answer: delimiter

indicates the beginning and end of a text data segment.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

76) By definition, a(n) shared fields.

Answer: relational

database is a collection of tables linked together by

Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Connect to an Access database

77)

recognizes patterns in data as you type and automatically fills in values for text and numeric data.

Answer: Flash Fill Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

78) Because Flash Fill involves less typing than traditional text functions, it can be easier to use on devices.

Answer: touch-enabled Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

79) The Answer: CLEAN

function removes nonprinting character codes.

Diff: 2 180 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

80) The function capitalizes the first letter of each word in a text string; the remaining characters are in lowercase.

Answer: PROPER Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

81) Use the end of a string.

Answer: TRIM

function when you want to remove spaces at the beginning or

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

82) The function extracts all text in a string that occurs before a specified delimiter.

Answer: TEXTBEFORE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

83) The function combines text strings from multiple cells into one string, with a specified delimiter between each value.

Answer: TEXTJOIN Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

84) The function replaces all occurrences of a specific substring within a text string with another substring.

Answer: SUBSTITUTE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

85) The Answer: LEN

function returns the total number of characters in a string.

181 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

86) The function calculates the number of working days between two dates, excluding weekends and optional holidays.

Answer: NETWORKDAYS Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Cleanse date-related data

87) To format a date as the full name of the day of the week, use the function with the format code "dddd".

Answer: TEXT Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Cleanse date-related data

88) Match the following terms with their description.

I. .accdb II. HTML III. .csv IV. Get & Transform V. XML A) Data stored in the Extensible Markup Language format B) Relational database format used in Microsoft Access C) Data stored in a comma-delimited format D) Tool used to connect to, clean, and transform external data sources in Excel E) Markup language used to structure content on web pages Answer: B, E, C, D, A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the importance of external data sets

89) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Delimiter II. XML schema III. HTML IV. Tab-delimited file V. XML A) Defines the content of data so it can be stored and transported B) A file format where fields are separated by tabs 182 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) Describes the structure of an XML document D) Defines the way web page data will be displayed by the browser E) A special character used to separate fields in text files Answer: E, C, D, B, A Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Understand and import XML and text data

90) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Relational database II. Primary key III. Foreign key IV. Access database V. Power Query A) Collection of tables linked by shared fields B) A field that is linked to a primary key in another table C) Unique identifier for a record D) A tool in Excel used for importing and transforming data E) Uses the .accdb or .mdb file extension Answer: A, C, B, E, D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Connect to an Access database

91) Match the following functions with their description.

I. CLEAN II. LOWER III. PROPER IV. TRIM V. UPPER A) Removes all spaces from text except single spaces between words B) Removes nonprinting characters C) Converts to uppercase D) Capitalizes only the first letter in each word E) Converts to lowercase Answer: B, E, D, A, C Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Flash Fill and text functions to cleanse imported data

92) Match the following functions with their description.

183 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

I. TEXTBEFORE II. TEXTAFTER III. TEXTJOIN IV. LEN V. MID A) Returns the text that appears after a specified delimiter in a text string B) Joins multiple text strings into one, separated by a specified delimiter C) Returns the number of characters in a text string D) Returns the text that appears before a specified delimiter in a text string E) Returns the specified number of characters starting at the character you specify Answer: D, A, B, C, E Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate data using text functions

93)

Match the following functions and features with their description.

I. TEXT II. NETWORKDAYS III. Flash Fill IV. Text to Columns V. WORKDAY A) Formats data as text or extracts parts like day names from a date B) Calculates the number of working days between two dates, excluding weekends and holidays C) Automatically identifies and fills patterns based on data input D) Splits data in a column into multiple columns based on a delimiter E) Returns a date that is a specific number of working days before or after a start date

Answer: A, B, C, D, E Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Cleanse date-related data Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 10: Data Tables, Scenario Manager, and Solver 1) A analysis studies the relationship between fixed and variable costs, sales volume, and profits.

A) variable cost B) cost-volume-prices C) cost-volume-profit D) cost-variable-profit Answer: C 184 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

2) Which of the following is NOT one of the three cost types to consider when calculating the break-even point?

A) Variable costs B) Mixed costs C) Fixed costs D) Alternative costs Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

3) A phone bill, which contains a base plan fee and then a fee per minute used, is an example of a(n) .

A) variable cost B) mixed cost C) fixed cost D) alternative cost Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

4) A is a form control that allows you to change a number in a target cell location in single-unit increments.

A) variable B) data bar C) break-even point D) scroll bar Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

5) A manager may want to highlight cells for employees who exceeded monthly sales quotas or products that are selling below cost. This is an example of .

A) break-even analysis B) conditional formatting 185 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) a data bar D) a data table Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

6) Which Excel feature applies visual cues such as color scales, data bars, or icon sets to emphasize specific trends or values in a worksheet?

A) Break-even analysis B) Conditional formatting C) A data table D) A scroll bar Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

7) If you want to apply a conditional format that would format different cells with different colors, where one color is assigned to the lowest group of values, another color is assigned to the highest group of values, and gradient colors are assigned to other values, you would use .

A) Top/Bottom Rules B) Data Bars C) Color Scales D) Icon Sets Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

8)

take(s) sets of input values, determine(s) possible results, and display(s) all the results in one table on one worksheet.

A) Data Bars B) Break-even analysis C) Conditional formatting D) A data table

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables 186 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

9) A data table has input values that are listed either as column oriented or row oriented.

A) one-variable B) two-variable C) custom D) preformatted Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

10) In a data table, the number format is used to disguise the formula references in the first row as labels.

A) Custom B) Scientific C) Text D) Special Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

11) Which what-if analysis tool would be best at comparing how interest rates affect a monthly car payment?

A) Goal Seek B) Scenario Manager C) One-variable data table D) Two-variable data table Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

12) In a data table, you must specify both the row input cell and the column input cell from the original data set.

A) custom B) one-variable C) two-variable D) preformatted Answer: C Diff: 2 187 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

13) A two-variable data table returns variables.

A) one B) two C) three D) four

result(s) for each combination of two

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

14) Which what-if analysis tool would be best at determining how much you can borrow for a car loan while paying only $275 a month?

A) Scenario Manager B) Solver C) Data table D) Goal Seek Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

15) What is the main difference between Goal Seek and data tables?

A) Goal Seek produces a list of result values.

B) Goal Seek uses the original worksheet data to change an input.

C) Goal Seek manipulates multiple variables to produce multiple results.

D) Goal Seek shows results in a separate table.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

16) Through a process called , Goal Seek repeatedly enters new values in the variable cell to find a solution to the problem.

A) iteration B) repetition C) valuation D) seeking 188 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

17) In the Goal Seek tool, what is the purpose of the "Set cell" box?

A) To specify the target value to achieve B) To identify the formula that determines the goal C) To define the input cell that will be adjusted D) To select the function used in the calculation Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

18) The To value box in the Goal Seek dialog box contains .

A) a cell reference from the formula that can be adjusted to achieve the goal B) a formula C) the desired result for the formula D) a function Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

19) Which of the following tasks can you accomplish using the Goal Seek tool in Excel?

A) Optimize a formula to meet a target value by adjusting a single input cell B) Analyze results across multiple scenarios C) Determine outcomes for a range of input variables simultaneously D) Validate data inputs based on predefined rules Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

20) The Scenario Manager dialog box enables you to do all of the following EXCEPT: A) add scenarios B) delete scenarios C) format scenarios D) edit scenarios Answer: C 189 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

21) What is the function of the "Add" button in the Scenario Manager dialog box?

A) To apply a selected scenario to the worksheet B) To merge scenarios from different worksheets C) To create a new scenario with user-defined inputs D) To generate a Scenario Summary report Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

22) What is the purpose of the "Show" button in the Scenario Manager dialog box?

A) It applies a selected scenario to the worksheet.

B) It generates a Scenario Summary report.

C) It creates a new scenario.

D) It merges scenarios from different worksheets.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

23) What happens when you add a new scenario and generate a new Scenario Summary report?

A) The new report will be created on a new worksheet.

B) The new scenario will be included in the old report.

C) The new report will be added directly below the original report.

D) The new report will replace the original report.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Create scenario reports

24) Which of the following is TRUE about Scenario Summary reports?

A) New reports appear on separate worksheets.

B) Reports cannot be formatted.

C) Click the Show button to create a report.

D) Headings cannot be added once the report is generated.

Answer: A 190 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Create scenario reports

25) Which button in the Scenario Manager dialog box is used to generate a summary report that compares multiple scenarios?

A) Summary B) Add C) Merge D) Show Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create scenario reports

26) Which of the following tools is NOT in the What-If Analysis command in the Forecast group on the Data tab?

A) Scenario Manager B) Solver C) Data Table D) Goal Seek Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Understand the use of the Solver add-in

27) All of the following statements are TRUE regarding Solver EXCEPT: A) Business managers can use Solver to minimize or maximize the output based on the constraints.

B) The purpose of using Solver is to perform what-if analysis to solve complex problems and to optimize the outcome.

C) Before configuring the Solver constraints, you need to ensure that you create a spreadsheet model that can be used to manipulate the values for your variables.

D) For the Solver to work properly, the formula in the result cell must reference and depend on the variable cells for part of its calculation.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Understand the use of the Solver add-in

28) A(n) is an application with specific functionality geared toward accomplishing a specific goal.

191 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) Scenario Manager B) data table C) downloadable app D) add-in Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Understand the use of the Solver add-in

29) Where do you go to begin loading the Solver add-in?

A) Install on the Add-Ins tab B) Options on the File tab C) Add-In options on the File tab D) What-If Analysis on the Data tab Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Understand the use of the Solver add-in

30)

are rules you establish when formulating your Solver model.

A) Constraints B) By changing variable cells C) Input values D) Objective cells

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Understand the use of the Solver add-in

31) Solver can be used for A) complex problem solving B) conditional formatting C) consolidating data D) removing duplicate data

.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver

32) Which of the following is NOT one of the three parameters in Solver?

A) Constraints 192 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) Changing cells C) Input value D) Objective cell Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver

33) All of the following solving methods are available within the Solver Parameters dialog box EXCEPT: A) Simplex LP method B) Evolutionary method C) GRG Nonlinear method D) Linear programming method Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver

34) The is the default method that Excel's Solver uses.

A) Simplex LP method B) Evolutionary method C) GRG Nonlinear method D) Linear programming method Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver

35) The is the most complex solving method because it is both nonlinear and nonsmooth.

A) Simplex LP method B) Evolutionary method C) GRG Nonlinear method D) Linear programming method Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver

36) All of the following are types of Solver reports EXCEPT: 193 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) Solver Limits report B) Solver Statistical report C) Solver Population report D) Solver Sensitivity report Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

37) Which Solver report type displays various statistical characteristics about the model?

A) Solver Limits report B) Solver Statistical report C) Solver Population report D) Solver Sensitivity report Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

38) A constraint that affects the optimal solution is considered a A) binding B) nonbinding C) linear D) model

constraint.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

39) What information is displayed in the first section of a Solver report?

A) objective cell information B) variable cells information C) report details D) constraints information Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

40) What is the purpose of the "Load/Save" button in the Solver Parameters dialog box?

A) To save and reload Solver models for reuse 194 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) To generate Solver reports for analysis C) To add or remove constraints for Solver optimization D) To switch between different solving methods Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

41) Managers can use break-even analysis to calculate the break-even point in sales volume or dollars.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

42) When a golf course is open for business, they have to pay management salaries regardless of how many customers they have during the day. This is an example of a variable cost.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

43) Utilities such as electricity and water are examples of mixed costs.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

44) What-if analysis tools provide definitive solutions to problems.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

45) Goal Seek adjusts the value in a single input cell to achieve a desired result in the formula cell.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis 195 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

46) The scroll bar is a type of scenario tool because of the ability to calculate numerous outputs in other cells by referencing the target cell in formulas and functions.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

47) If a manager wanted to highlight a cell once its value reached the break-even point, the manager would apply the Icon Sets conditional formatting option.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

48) Excel contains three types of what-if analysis tools on the Data tab: Data Table, Scenario Manager, and Goal Seek.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

49) For a one-variable data table, you must specify both the row input cell and column input cell from the original data set.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

50) Formulas that are used in a one-variable data table must refer to several input cells.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

51) A two-variable data table can be used to calculate elasticity.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

196 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

52) If a product or service is not responsive to change it is inelastic.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

53) Goal Seek creates a separate worksheet to display the results of its calculations.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

54) Iteration settings cannot be changed once created.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

55) The Scenario Manager enables you to add, edit, and delete scenarios.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

56) Scenarios can be created without a formula or function on your worksheet.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

57) The number of scenarios you can create is limitless.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

58) If you delete a scenario and change your mind, you can use the Undo button to undo your deletion.

Answer: FALSE 197 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

59) The value you want to achieve in Goal Seek needs to be entered in the To value box in the Goal Seek dialog box.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create scenario reports

60) By selecting the Scenario Summary option, you can create a worksheet that includes subtotals and the results of the scenarios.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Create scenario reports

61) A Scenario PivotTable report allows a three-dimensional view of data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Create scenario reports

62) Solver can be used to find values that optimize a problem.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Understand the use of the Solver add-in

63) When using Solver, the constraint cell directly determines the value of the objective cell.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Understand the use of the Solver add-in

64) The Simplex LP, Generalized Reduced Gradient (GRG) Nonlinear, and Evolutionary are the three solving methods within the Solver Parameters dialog box.

Answer: TRUE 198 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver

65) The Reports list in the Solver Results dialog box displays the available report types.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

66) Changing a binding constraint also changes the optimal solution.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

67) The last section of the Solver report displays variable cells information about the report.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

68) To open a saved Solver model, you must first click the Load/Save button in the Solver Parameters dialog box.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

69) Managers use to determine the minimum volume the business needs to make and sell if it is a manufacturer, or buy and sell if it is a retail business.

Answer: break-even analysis Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

70) The scroll bar is a type of tool because of the ability to calculate numerous outputs in other cells by referencing the target cell in formulas and functions.

199 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: scenario Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

71) To add a scroll bar, you first need to add the Answer: Developer

tab to the ribbon.

Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

72) The What-If Analysis tools in Excel, such as Goal Seek and Data Tables, are used to explore how changes in input values affect values.

Answer: output Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

73) If a manager wanted to analyze how interest rates affect a monthly loan payment, the best data table to use would be the data table.

Answer: one-variable Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

74) Input values are listed in both columns and rows in a(n) Answer: two-variable

data table.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

75) If a small change in price is accompanied by a large change in quantity demanded, a product or service is considered .

Answer: elastic Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

76) If a large change in price is accompanied by a small amount of change in demand, a product or service is considered .

200 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: inelastic Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

77) In the Goal Seek dialog box, the Answer: Set cell

box contains a formula.

Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

78) The Goal Seek tool allows you to find the necessary input value to achieve a specific result in a .

Answer: formula Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

79) Goal Seek repeatedly enters new values in the variable cell through a process called .

Answer: iteration Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Use Goal Seek to determine values needed to achieve an objective

80) A(n) allows you to build a what-if analysis model that includes variable cells linked by one or more formulas or functions.

Answer: scenario Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

81) Of the three What-If Analysis tools available on the Data tab, the compare more than two variables.

Answer: Scenario Manager Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

82) The Scenario Manager has the ability to add, edit, merge, and 201 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

can

scenarios.

Answer: delete Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

83) In the Scenario Manager dialog box, the "Add" button is used to create a new .

Answer: scenario Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

84) Click the report options.

Answer: Summary

button in the Scenario Manager dialog box to view scenario

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Create scenario reports

85) To compare scenarios, create a(n) Answer: Scenario Summary

report.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Create scenario reports

86) A(n) is an application with specific functionality geared toward accomplishing a specific goal.

Answer: add-in Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Understand the use of the Solver add-in

87) The three parameters available in Solver are objective cell, changing cells, and.

Answer: constraints Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver

202 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

88) In Solver, the Answer: objective

cell always contains a formula.

Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver

89) In Solver, the first step in creating an analysis is identifying the optimize.

Answer: goal

to

Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver

90) The Solver value.

Answer: Limits

Report shows the upper and lower bounds for the optimal

Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

91) The Solver Report displays various statistical characteristics about the given model, such as how many variables and rows it contains.

Answer: Population Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

92) The Solver Report lists the objective cell and the changing cells with their corresponding original and final values for the problem, input variables, and constraints.

Answer: Answer Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

93) A constraint that does not affect the optimal solution is a(n) Answer: nonbinding Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports 203 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

constraint.

94) In the Solver Parameters dialog box, constraints, variable cells, and the cell are defined to set up an optimization problem.

Answer: objective Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Generate and interpret Solver answer reports

95) Match the following terms to their description.

I Fixed costs II Break-even analysis III Mixed costs IV Break-even point V Variable costs A) A cost-volume-profit analysis tool that calculates the break-even point in sales volume or dollars, estimates profit or loss at any level of sales volume, and helps in setting prices B) Costs that change based on how many products are sold or services are rendered C) Expenses that never change regardless of how much product is sold or how many services are rendered D) Costs that contain a variable component and a fixed component E) The sales level at which revenue equals total costs Answer: C, A, D, E, B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

96) Match the following terms to their description.

I Two-variable data table II One-variable data table III Variable IV What-if analysis V Scroll bar A) A tool that provides various results based on changing one variable B) A value that you can change to see how that change affects other values C) A form control that allows you to change a number in a target cell location in single-unit increments D) Summarizes the effects that two variables have on one result E) The process of changing variables to observe how changes affect calculated results Answer: D, A, B, E, C Diff: 1 204 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

97) Match the following terms to their description.

I Highlight Cells Rules II Icon Sets III Color Scales IV Data Bars V Top/Bottom Rules A) Formats different cells with different colors; one color is assigned to the lowest group of values, another color to the highest group of values, and gradient colors for other values B) Formats cells with values in the top 10 items, top 10%, bottom 10 items, bottom 10 %, above average, or below average C) Applies a color gradient or solid fill bar D) Inserts an icon from the icon palette E) Highlights cells with a fill color, font color, or border if values are greater than, less than, between two values, equal to a value, or duplicate values Answer: E, D, A, C, B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Perform break-even analysis

98) Match the following terms to their description.

I Unit elastic II Perfectly inelastic III Perfectly elastic IV Relatively elastic V Relatively inelastic A) For elasticity values of zero, a change in price has no influence on demand.

B) For elasticity values of one, any change in price results in an equal and opposite change in demand.

C) If the elasticity is less than 1, large changes in price will cause small changes in demand.

D) If the elasticity is greater than 1, demand is very responsive to changes in price.

E) For high elasticity values, any change in price causes a vast change in demand.

Answer: B, A, E, D, C Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Analyze variables in formulas through the use of data tables

99) Match the following terms to their description.

I Scenario Manager 205 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

II Scenario Summary report III Changing cells IV Scenario PivotTable report V Scenario A) Data cells whose values differ in each scenario B) A worksheet that includes a summary of the scenarios in PivotTable format C) A tool that enables you to define and manage scenarios to compare how they affect results D) A set of values that represent a possible situation E) A worksheet that contains the scenario results Answer: C, E, A, B, D Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use the Scenario Manager to create scenarios

100) Match the following terms to their description.

I Changing variable cell II Add-in III Objective cell IV Binding constraint V Constraint A) The cell that contains the formula-based value that you want to optimize B) A cell containing a variable whose value changes until Solver optimizes the objective cell C) An application that can be added to a primary program, such as Excel, that is not automatically activated D) A limitation that imposes restrictions on Solver E) A rule that Solver has to enforce to reach the optimal solution Answer: B, C, A, E, D Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver

101) Match the following terms to their description.

I Linear programming II Simplex LP method III GRG Nonlinear method IV Evolutionary method V Solver A) A linear model in which the variables are not raised to any powers and no transcendent functions are used B) The most complex method, which is used for nonlinear and nonsmooth models C) An add-in analysis tool that manipulates variables based on predetermined 206 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

constraints to find the optimal solution D) The default method for Solver, which is used for nonlinear and smooth models E) A mathematical method for determining how to attain the best outcome in a mathematical model Answer: E, A, D, B, C Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Solve complex problems using Solver Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 11: Loan Amortization, Investment Analysis, and Asset Depreciation 1) Often used to determine a company's value, into and out of a business.

A) NPV B) economic risk C) capital budgeting D) cash flow

is the movement of cash

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

2) A(n) occurs when a chosen act or activity might not generate enough revenue to cover operating costs and repay debt obligations.

A) N P V B) cash flow C) economic risk D) capital budgeting Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with PMT, RATE, and NPER

3) Which Excel function calculates the monthly payment for a $100,000 mortgage loan, with a 5% annual interest rate and a term of 30 years, assuming monthly payments?

A) IF B) PV C) FV D) PMT Answer: D Diff: 1 207 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

4) The pv argument in the P MT function represents the A) payment amount B) percentage rate C) present value D) percentage value

of the loan.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

5) The A) type B) f v C) nper D) rate

argument in the P MT function represents the number of periods.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

6) In the PMT function, which argument specifies the remaining balance (e.g., $0 for full loan repayment) after the last payment is made?

A) p v B) nper C) f v D) rate Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

7) What is correct to enter for the periodic interest rate argument in a PMT formula for a 6% annual interest loan, with monthly payments over six years?

A) 06 *12 B) 06 / 12 C) 6 D) 6 / 12 Answer: B 208 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

8) If you don't know the interest rate for a loan but you know the present value, payment amount, and number of payment periods, you can use the function to determine the interest rate.

A) GUESS B) PMT C) NPER D) RATE Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

9) The argument is used when you want to speculate about what the interest rate would be when using the RATE function.

A) guess B) type C) f v D) p v Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with PMT, RATE, and NPER

10) The function calculates the interest rate per period for an investment or loan, given that you know the present value of the loan, payment amount, and number of payment periods.

A) RATE B) NPV C) IP MT D) NPER Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

11) The function calculates the number of payment periods for an investment or loan if you know the loan amount, interest rate, and payment amount.

209 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) IPMT B) NPV C) RATE D) NPER Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

12) If you don't know the number of periods for a loan but you know the present value, payment amount, and interest rate, you can use the function to determine the number of periods.

A) GUESS B) RATE C) PMT D) NPER Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

13) The function calculates the amount of interest paid over a specific number of periods.

A) CUMPRINC B) CUMIPMT C) PPMT D) IPMT Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate cumulative interest and principal using CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC

14) What is the correct formula to calculate the cumulative interest paid for the second year (periods 13-24) on a 5-year mortgage loan with monthly payments, a $250,000 principal, and a 9% annual interest rate?

A)  CUMIPMT .09 / 12,5 * 12,250000,24,13,0  B)  CUMIPMT .09 * 12,30 / 12, 250000,13,24,0  C)  CUMIPMT .09 / 12,30 / 12, 250000,24,13,0  D)  -CUMIPMT .09 / 12,5 * 12,250000,13,24,0  210 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Calculate cumulative interest and principal using CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC

15) The function can be used to identify the principal portion for a mortgage payment.

A) PPMT B) FV C) PMT D) IPMT Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using PPMT and I PMT

16) Amortization tables typically display information about loan payments. Which of the following details is NOT included?

A) Interest rate for each payment B) Interest payments over the life of the loan C) Principal payments over the life of the loan D) Remaining balance of the loan Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using P PMT and IPMT

17) The PMT function and the P PMT function use all the same arguments EXCEPT: A) type B) pv C) f v D) per Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using P PMT and IPMT

18) The payment.

A) PPMT

function can be used to identify the interest portion for a mortgage

211 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) IPMT C) PMT D) FV Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using P PMT and IPMT

19) Which of the following statements about amortization schedules is FALSE? A) The sum of the interest payments will always equal the loan amount.

B) A given periodic payment will equal the sum of the interest payment and the principal payment.

C) The final remaining balance value in the table should be zero.

D) All interest and principal paid should equal the sum of all the payments made.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using P PMT and IPMT

20) Which of the following statements about investments is FALSE? A) Stocks are categorized as equity securities.

B) A security is a legal document that can be bought and sold and holds some financial value.

C) In terms of economic risk for stocks and bonds, stocks are typically considered less risky.

D) Bonds are categorized as debt securities.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using P V and FV

21) A recurring amount paid or received at specified intervals is a(n) A) principal B) annuity C) interest rate D) amortization schedule Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using PV and FV

212 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

22) A(n) is the ratio of the amount of money gained or lost from an investment relative to the initial amount invested.

A) maturity ratio B) equity distribution C) return on investment D) return on security Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using PV and FV

23) The dollars.

A) NPV B) PV C) FV D) PMT

function calculates what an investment would be worth in today's

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using P V and FV

24) The investment.

A) PV B) FV C) PMT D) NPV

function can help businesses determine the future return on an

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using P V and FV

25) The FV function has two optional arguments, A) payment; type B) p v; type C) p v; rate D) rate; payment

and

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using P V and FV 213 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

26) Which financial analysis method is typically used by companies to evaluate long-term investments, such as purchasing machinery or starting a new project?

A) an amortization table B) cash flows C) capital budgeting D) present value analysis Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using N PV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

27) The function is used to determine the value of an investment by analyzing a series of future incoming and outgoing cash flows expected to occur over the life of the investment.

A) XIRR B) NPV C) XNPV D) IRR Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using NPV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

28) The function determines the value of an investment or business by analyzing an irregular time series of incoming and outgoing cash flows.

A) IRR B) XIRR C) XNPV D) NPV Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using NPV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

29) The function indicates the profitability of an investment and is commonly used in business to assist in choosing between investments.

A) XIRR B) XNPV C) IRR D) NPV Answer: C 214 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using N PV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

30) The periodic.

A) NPV B) XNPV C) XIRR D) IRR

function analyzes a series of cash flows that are irregular or not

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using N PV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

31) The method of depreciation calculates depreciation at the highest accelerated rate.

A) straight-line B) double declining balance C) accumulated D) declining balance Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using S LN, DB, and DDB

32) The method of depreciation assumes that the value of an asset depreciates more in the first year than in the second year.

A) straight-line B) accumulated C) declining balance D) double distributing balance Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using S LN, DB, and DDB

33) The method of depreciation assumes that an asset loses the same amount of value each year of its life.

A) double distributing balance B) accumulated 215 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) declining balance D) straight-line Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using S LN, DB, and DDB

34) Which of the following is NOT typically recorded in a depreciation schedule?

A) accumulated depreciation B) the date an asset was placed into service C) net book value D) calculation for each year's depreciation Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using S LN, DB, and DDB

35) The method of depreciation calculates depreciation evenly over the life of the asset.

A) double-depreciation B) fixed-declining balance C) straight-line D) accumulated depreciation Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using S LN, DB, and DDB

36) The of an asset is the estimated value of the asset at the end of its useful life.

A) salvage value B) death C) principal D) depreciation Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using S LN, DB, and DDB

37) The SLN function has A) three

arguments.

216 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) six C) four D) five Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using S LN, DB, and DDB

38) The statement of cash flow can aid in determining whether a company is able to collect payments from customers and pay its bills.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

39) The statement of cash flow can be used by banks to determine whether a company is eligible for a business loan.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

40) To calculate a loan payment for a mortgage loan with a annual interest rate of 4%, you would enter .04 for the rate argument in a function.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

41) By default, the PMT function returns a positive payment amount.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

42) The f v and type arguments for the PMT function are considered optional arguments.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER 217 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

43) From the lender's perspective, in the context of the P MT function, incoming cash flows of the monthly payment from the borrower to the lender are represented as a positive number.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

44) When using the PMT function, you should type a negative sign in front of the present value of the loan so that the payment will result in a positive value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

45) The type argument is used in the PMT function and is an optional argument.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

46) You could use amortization analysis to understand the specifics of how individual payments are applied towards a loan.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

47) Each loan payment in an amortized loan is made up of a principal amount and an interest amount.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Calculate cumulative interest and principal using CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC

48) The CUMIPMT function can be used to help calculate interest paid as a deduction for a federal tax return.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 218 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 2. Calculate cumulative interest and principal using CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC

49) The CUMIPMT function requires six arguments.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate cumulative interest and principal using CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC

50) The CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC functions return a positive value by default.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate cumulative interest and principal using CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC

51) An amortization schedule is a table that calculates the interest and principal payments along with the remaining balance of the loan for each period.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using P PMT and IPMT

52) An amortization table shows the interest rate for each payment.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using PPMT and IPMT

53) Interest and principal make up every payment in an amortization table.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using PPMT and IPMT

54) The PPMT and IPMT functions use the same syntax.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 219 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using PPMT and IPMT

55) As the total loan balance decreases, a larger proportion of each payment is applied to interest and a smaller proportion is applied to principal.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using PPMT and IPMT

56) The result of the PMT function equals the sum of the I PMT and PPMT results.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using PPMT and IPMT

57) Maturity is the interest rate the bond pays.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using P V and FV

58) The par value is how much the bondholder will receive at maturity.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using PV and FV

59) A security is a legal document that can be bought and sold and holds some financial value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using PV and FV

60) Yield is the amount of annual interest.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using PV and FV 220 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

61) The N P V function can determine the value of an investment over time by analyzing a series of future incoming and outgoing cash flows.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using N PV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

62) The series of values for the XNPV function must contain at least one positive and one negative value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using N PV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

63) The XIRR function is primarily used to calculate the internal rate of return for investments with irregular cash flow timings.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using N PV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

64) The series of values for the XIRR function must contain at least one positive and one negative value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using NPV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

65) There are two methods for calculating depreciation.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using S LN, DB, and DDB

66) A statement of sustainability.

Answer: cash flow

can be used to assess a company's short-term

Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER 221 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

67) To calculate a monthly loan payment for a 30-year mortgage loan with an annual interest rate of 4%, where A5 contains the annual rate, you would enter for the rate argument.

Answer: A5 / 12 ,  A5 / 12 Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

68) The Answer: principal

is the unpaid balance amount of the loan.

Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

69) A(n) occurs when a chosen act or activity might not generate enough revenue to cover operating costs and repay debt obligations.

Answer: economic risk Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

70)

is when you use several different values in one or more formulas to explore all the various results.

Answer: What-if analysis Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

71) You would use the function to determine the amount of interest paid over a specific number of periods.

Answer: CUMIPMT Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate cumulative interest and principal using CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC

72) As the total loan balance decreases, a smaller proportion is applied to interest and a greater proportion to .

Answer: principal Diff: 2 222 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using P PMT and IPMT

73) A loan schedule that calculates the interest and principal payments is known as a(n) table.

Answer: amortization Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using PPMT and IPMT

74) When analyzing a loan, a(n) can provide detailed information about payments, interest, and balances.

Answer: amortization schedule, amortization table Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using PPMT and IPMT

75)

are the costs associated with the loan and are never deducted from the beginning balance.

Answer: Interest payments Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using PPMT and IPMT

76) A(n) financial value.

Answer: security

is a legal document that can be bought and sold and holds some

Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using P V and FV

77) Stocks are categorized as securities because the company gives partial ownership of its equity by selling stock in the company.

Answer: equity Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using PV and FV

78)

are categorized as debt securities because the company is indebted to the people who loan the company money through the purchase of bonds.

Answer: Bonds 223 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using PV and FV

79) A(n) is the ratio of the amount of money gained or lost from an investment relative to the initial amount invested.

Answer: return on investment, ROI Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using PV and FV

80) The function helps calculate the present value of cash flows, which can be used to decide between a lump sum payment and smaller periodic payments over time.

Answer: PV Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using PV and FV

81) The FV function requires Answer: three

arguments.

Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Analyze bonds using PV and FV

82) The IRR and Answer: NPV

functions are used for capital budgeting purposes.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using N PV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

83) The Answer: XIRR

function analyzes a series of cash flows that are irregular.

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using NPV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

84) is a reduction in the value of a fixed asset from its original cost.

Answer: Depreciation Diff: 2 224 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using S LN, DB, and DDB

85) To report on a company's net book value on an annual tax return, a(n) schedule must be maintained.

Answer: depreciation Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using SLN, DB, and DDB

86) The is the estimated value of an asset at the end of its useful life.

Answer: salvage value Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using SLN, DB, and DDB

87) The life.

Answer: straight-line

method of depreciation spreads cost of an asset evenly over its

Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using SLN, DB, and DDB

88) The argument in the DDB function represents the rate at which the balance declines.

Answer: factor Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using SLN, DB, and DDB

89) Match the PMT function arguments with their descriptions.

I. Fv II. P v III. Nper IV. Type V. Rate A) Interest rate B) The total number of payments C) Loan amount D) Balance amount after last payment E) Indicates when payments are due 225 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: D, C, B, E, A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Construct a loan analysis with P MT, RATE, and NPER

90) Match the functions with their descriptions.

I. PPMT II. IPMT III. PMT IV. RATE V. NPER A) Calculates interest payment B) Calculates principal payment C) Calculates the interest rate D) Calculates total number of payments E) Calculates total loan payment Answer: B, A, E, C, D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create an amortization schedule using PPMT and IPMT

91) Match the functions with their descriptions.

I. FV II. NPV III. PV IV. IRR V. XNPV A) Calculates value of an investment by analyzing an irregular time series of cash flows B) Calculates what an investment will be worth in the future C) Calculates the profitability of a potential investment D) Calculates current value of future payments E) Used to determine the value of an investment by analyzing a series of future incoming and outgoing cash flows that are expected to occur over the life of the investment Answer: B, E, D, C, A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Analyze investments using NPV, XNPV, IRR, and XIRR

92) Match the terms with their descriptions.

226 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

I. Depreciation schedule II. Amortization table III. Capital budgeting IV. Cash flow V. Principal A) Evaluates whether long-term investments are worth pursuing B) Shows depreciation of an asset over time C) Calculates interest and principal payments along with the remaining balance of a loan D) The balance on a loan E) Movement of cash into and out of a business Answer: B, C, A, E, D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using SLN, DB, and DDB

93) Match the terms with their descriptions.

I. DDB II. DB III. SLN IV. Factor V. Depreciation A) Argument for the rate at which the balance declines B) Calculates the depreciation of an asset; higher accelerated rate with this method C) Shows the value of an asset over time D) Calculates the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixed declining balance method E) Calculates the depreciation of an asset; permits twice the straight-line annual percentage rate to be applied each year Answer: E, B, D, A, C Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using SLN, DB, and DDB

94) Match the DDB function arguments with their descriptions.

I. Factor II. Period III. Salvage IV. Cost V. Life A) Number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated B) Purchase price of an asset 227 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) Rate at which the balance declines D) Time period for the calculation E) Value at the end of an asset's useful life Answer: C, D, E, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Calculate the depreciation of assets using S LN, DB, and DDB Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 12: Business Statistics and Regression Analysis 1)

is the practice of collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data.

A) Descriptive statistics B) Probability C) Inferential statistics D) Statistics

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

2) The spa calculates the total revenue that a spa package generates over the course of a year. This is an example of .

A) descriptive statistics B) probability C) inferential statistics D) statistics Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

3)

is the likelihood that some event will occur based on what is already known.

A) Descriptive statistics B) Probability C) Inferential statistics D) Statistics

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics 228 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

4) The spa manager surveys 100 random customers about their opinions on a new service being offered at the spa. Based on the results of that random sample, managers at the spa can make assumptions about whether or not the new s pa service would go over well. This is an example of .

A) descriptive statistics B) probability C) inferential statistics D) statistics Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

5) Which of the following statements is NOT a correct description of the language of statistics?

A) Business professionals rely heavily on inferential distributions.

B) Discussions of statistics often refer to populations and samples.

C) Businesses can use various statistical methods in many areas to get a better understanding of the organization.

D) Statistics can be used to determine the effectiveness of advertising campaigns, to understand what factors contribute to the demand for your products, to spot seasonal trends in the sales of certain products, and much more.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

6) A(n) represents all possible values and likelihoods a variable can take within a specific range, often shown as a graph, table, or formula.

A) continuous variable B) probability distribution C) observational unit D) discrete variable Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

7) The spa manager uses data such as the number of soaps in a box and the number of different services the spa offers its customers. These are examples of .

A) probability distributions B) discrete variables 229 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) continuous variables D) populations Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

8) The spa manager uses data such as time between sales transactions, the weight of a package for shipping, and the amount of money a customer spends in any given visit.

These are examples of .

A) probability distributions B) discrete variables C) continuous variables D) populations Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

9) If a product is tested 100 times, and the rate of failure is recorded on a scale of 1 to 10, the average of these scores would be an example of data.

A) nominal B) ordinal C) interval D) ratio Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the basic types of data

10)

data measures the size of the difference between values.

A) Nominal B) Ordinal C) Interval D) Ratio

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the basic types of data

11)

variables are often used to categorize responses in a survey.

230 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) Nominal B) Ordinal C) Interval D) Ratio Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the basic types of data

12) If a manager learns that product 1 failed after 15 tests and product 2 failed after only 5, then data could state that product 1 passed 3 times as many tests as product 2.

A) nominal B) ordinal C) interval D) ratio Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the basic types of data

13) The random sample.

A) SAMPLE B) RANDOM C) SAMP D) RAND

function in Excel is one method that can help with creating a

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

14) The A) mean B) median C) mode D) range

is the value that appears most often in a sample.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel 231 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

15) The of a data set is calculated by dividing the sum of all values by the total number of observations.

A) mean B) mode C) range D) median Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

16) Calculating the range, variance, and standard deviation of a data set are all methods used to determine the of a data set.

A) concentration B) dispersion C) standard deviation D) central tendency Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

17)

is a calculation used in statistics to determine how far the data set varies from the mean.

A) Variance B) Range C) Standard deviation D) Central tendency

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

18) Which of the following statements regarding variance is FALSE? A) The higher the variance calculation, the more dispersed the data set.

B) Variance is most useful because its value is in the same unit as the median and therefore easier to interpret.

C) Variance provides a more accurate picture of the dispersion of a data set than a range.

D) Due to the way variance is calculated, the value is not in the same units as the mean.

Answer: B 232 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

19) Finding the central tendency of a data set may lead to incorrect assumptions about the data due to possible .

A) variance B) inliers C) standard deviation D) outliers Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

20) When analyzing a data set in Excel, which of the following functions is most appropriate for calculating the total variation within the data?

A) AVERAGE B) VAR.P C) MAX D) COUNT Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

21) The Turquoise Oasis Spa places orders for cases of bath salts through a nearby wholesaler. To summarize several orders worth of data, it may prove beneficial to determine how many orders of bath salts were for 1 to 10 cases, for 11 to 20 cases, for 21 to 30 cases, for 31 to 40 cases, and for more than 40 cases. This is an example of .

A) grouping the data into bins B) calculating variances C) a probability distribution D) sample populations Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

22) The FREQUENCY function is useful for

.

233 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) summarizing data distribution into specified intervals B) calculating the average of a data set C) estimating future values of a data set D) modeling time between events Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

23)

is the middle value(s) when all the values of the sample are sorted in ascending order.

A) Kurtosis B) Mean C) Standard error D) Median

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

24)

is the average of the variables in the sample.

A) Kurtosis B) Mean C) Standard error D) Median

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

25)

characterizes the peakedness or flatness of a distribution compared to the normal distribution.

A) Kurtosis B) Skewness C) Standard error D) Sample variance

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis 234 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

ToolPak

26) The statistical graph that summarizes the distribution of data and how the data fits into defined bins is a .

A) histogram B) kurtosis C) bin D) sample variance Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

27)

calculates the average of values over time based on specified intervals.

A) standard error B) sample variance C) mean D) moving average

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

28) Small businesses tend to experience more volatility than large organizations and can therefore benefit greatly from using to estimate future outcomes and events.

A) sample variance B) standard error C) moving averages D) probability distributions Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

29) The distribution is a discrete probability distribution that is used to model the number of successful trials based on the total number of trials and the rate of success.

235 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) normal B) exponential C) binomial D) Poisson Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

30) The distribution is a continuous probability function that models the times between events.

A) normal B) exponential C) binomial D) Poisson Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

31) A discrete probability function that has wide business applications is the distribution.

A) normal B) exponential C) binomial D) Poisson Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

32) The can calculate the relationship between two variables, like age and dollars spent as well as the direction of the relationship.

A) discrete probability function B) correlation coefficient C) correlation D) covariance Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Find relationships in data using COVARIANCE.S and CORREL 236 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

33) Managers at the Turquoise Oasis Spa are interested in knowing whether there is a relationship between the age of their clients and the amount of money they spend in the spa. Upon analyzing the data, they found a correlation coefficient of 0.672. Thus, the relationship between the two variables is .

A) strong B) moderate C) weak D) very weak Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Find relationships in data using COVARIANCE.S and CORREL

34) Correlation coefficient values are easy to interpret, but it is often more powerful to create a chart that illustrates that relationship visually.

A) matrix B) quick analysis C) histogram D) scatter Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Find relationships in data using COVARIANCE.S and CORREL

35) Calculating the correlation coefficient using the function is useful to determine the type and strength of a relationship between two variables.

A) CAUSATION B) COVARIANCE.S C) CORREL D) COVARIANCE.P Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Determine relationships between multiple variables using a correlation matrix

36)

is a method used to predict future values by analyzing the relationships between two or more variables.

A) Standard deviation B) Kurtosis C) Regression analysis D) Intercept coefficient 237 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use regression analysis to predict future values

37) The provides a more conservative estimate of the independent variables' ability to predict the value of the dependent variable.

A) R-squared value B) correlation coefficient C) regression analysis D) intercept coefficient Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use regression analysis to predict future values

38) The is the value at which a regression line will cross the y-axis and is used in the slope intercept formula to predict values.

A) R-squared value B) correlation coefficient C) regression analysis D) intercept coefficient Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use regression analysis to predict future values

39) Which of the following is NOT a common use of regression analysis?

A) Predicting future outcomes B) Identifying relationships between variables C) Calculating the average of a data set D) Estimating the impact of independent variables on a dependent variable Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use regression analysis to predict future values

40) Inferential statistics is the process of deriving meaningful information from raw data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 238 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

41) Descriptive statistics is the process of taking data from a sample of the population and making predictions about the entire population.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

42) Statistics typically describe what has already happened, and probability describes what is likely to happen in the future.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

43) In a data set consisting of gender, salary, and name of employees, the employees are the observational unit, and the variables are the gender, salary, and names.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

44) The more random the sample, the more accurate the statistical analysis will be, in part because randomness eliminates bias.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

45) In administering a survey where respondents answer "Yes" or "No" to a specific question, ordinal data could be used to categorize the responses, such as 1 = Yes and 2 = No. Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the basic types of data

46) Nominal data is often used when precise measurements are challenging or impossible to obtain.

239 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the basic types of data

47) Ratio data is similar to ordinal data in that both only rank-order items without quantifying differences.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the basic types of data

48) Interval data measures the size of the difference between values.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the basic types of data

49) Every time any cell is edited, or a new formula is created, the value generated by the RAND function will change.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

50) To calculate the mean in Excel, the AVERAGE function is used.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

51) Calculating the range, variance, and kurtosis of a data set are all measures used to describe the dispersion of a data set.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

52) A range is the simplest method to calculate the dispersion of a data set and can provide a rough idea of how the data set is dispersed.

240 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

53) Adding the minimum value and the maximum value together provides the range in a data set.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

54) Outliers are data that are abnormally different from the other values in a random sample.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

55) An array function in Excel can only return a single result, regardless of the input size.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

56) When creating a frequency table using the FREQUENCY function, you must select a range of cells that is one more than the cells containing the bin values.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

57) The Analysis ToolPak allows you to conduct a variety of statistical analyses with ease.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

241 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

58) A histogram is a statistical graph that summarizes the distribution of data and how the data fits into defined bins.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

59) Although Excel can automatically generate evenly distributed bin values based on the minimum and maximum values of the input range, it is often better to define your own bin ranges.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

60) Moving averages can be useful in spotting trends over a period of time by smoothing out any fluctuations that may occur during each consecutive interval.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

61) A normal distribution is displayed as a bell-shaped curve on a chart.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

62) Covariance is a formula that can calculate the relationship between two variables, like gender and dollars spent as well as the direction of the relationship.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Find relationships in data using COVARIANCE.S and CORREL

63) Regression analysis is a method used to predict future values by analyzing the relationships between two or more variables.

Answer: TRUE 242 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use regression analysis to predict future values

64) The R-squared value is always labeled as Squared R in the output and is calculated by squaring the correlation coefficient.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use regression analysis to predict future values

65) is the practice of collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data.

Answer: Statistics Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

66)

statistics is the process of deriving meaningful information from raw data.

Answer: Descriptive Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

67)

statistics is the process of taking data from a sample of the population and making predictions about the entire population.

Answer: Inferential Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

68)

is the likelihood that some event will occur based on what is already known.

Answer: Probability Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

69) In a data set consisting of gender, salary, and name of employees, the employees are the and the variables are the gender, salary, and names.

243 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: observational unit Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

70) The more Answer: random

a sample, the more accurate the statistical analysis will be.

Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

71)

typically describe what has already happened, and probability describes what is likely to happen in the future.

Answer: Statistics Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

72) In business, performance classifications of employees, number of soaps in a box, and the number of different services a spa offers its customers are all examples of .

Answer: discrete variables Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

73) In business, time between sales transactions, the weight of a package for shipping, and the amount of money a customer spends in any given visit are all examples of .

Answer: continuous variables Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

74)

data is used to rank variables in order, but the differences between ranks may not be equal.

Answer: Ordinal Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the basic types of data 244 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

75) The Answer: RAND

function generates a random number between 0 and 1.

Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

76) The mean, median, and mode calculations attempt to define the data set.

Answer: central tendency

of a

Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

77) If there are seven variables sorted in ascending order, the value is the fourth variable in the list where there are three variables above and three variables below.

Answer: median Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

78) The is the value that appears most frequently in a data set and is applicable to both discrete data and continuous data.

Answer: mode Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

79) To calculate the mean in Excel, the Answer: AVERAGE

function is used.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

80) Calculating the range, variance, and standard deviation of a data set are all methods used to determine the of a data set.

Answer: dispersion Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel 245 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

81) Mathematically, the variance.

Answer: standard deviation

is calculated by taking the square root of the

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

82) When working with large data sets, it can be useful to group the data into .

Answer: bins Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

83) The FREQUENCY function in Excel is a(n) function that creates a frequency distribution that calculates how often values occur within a bin.

Answer: array Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

84) Depending on the options that were selected upon the installation of Excel, you may have to manually install the add-in, which allows you to conduct a variety of statistical analyses.

Answer: Analysis ToolPak Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

85) A(n) is a statistical graph that summarizes the distribution of data and how the data fits into defined bins.

Answer: histogram Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

86) A(n) is used to create charts that show whether the values in a dataset are trending upward or downward.

Answer: moving average 246 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

87)

distributions are useful in predicting demand for products and services, successful marketing campaigns, effectiveness of advertising, and much more.

Answer: Probability Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

88) A(n) probability distribution takes on the shape of a bell and is often referred to as the bell-shaped curve.

Answer: normal Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

89) If the cumulative argument of the N OR M.DI ST function is set to TRUE, the result will be the probability of a value being less than or equal to the value of the x argument, known as the distribution function.

Answer: cumulative Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

90) If the cumulative argument of the N ORM.DI ST function is set to FALSE, the result will be the probability of a value being equal to the value of the x argument, known as the density function.

Answer: probability Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

91) The distribution is a discrete probability distribution that is used to model the number of successful trials based on the total number of trials and the rate of success.

Answer: binomial Diff: 3 247 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

92) The service.

Answer: Poisson

distribution is used most often to predict demand for a product or

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

93) The distribution calculates the probability of selecting a specific number of target items from a population without replacement.

Answer: hypergeometric Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Predict business outcomes using probability distribution functions

94) The function returns a prediction of a future value based on historical data.

Answer: FORECAST.ETS Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Predict future values based on historical data

95) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Data II. Data set III. Observational unit IV. Sample population V. Probability distribution A) Collection of related data B) Person, object, or event about which data is collected C) Values that describe an attribute of an object or an event D) Can be in the form of a graph, table, or formula E) A subset of a population Answer: C, A, B, E, D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the language of statistics

96) Match the following terms with their description.

248 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

I. Nominal data II. Data set III. Ordinal data IV. Interval data V. Ratio data A) Differences between the data can be quantified and proportions can be specified B) Often used to categorize responses in a survey C) Measures the size of the difference between values D) Ranks data as first, second, third, and so on E) Collection of related data Answer: B, E, D, C, A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the basic types of data

97) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Mean II. Median III. Mode IV. Central tendency V. Variance A) Average of all the variables in a sample B) Determines how far the data set varies from the mean C) The way data is likely to cluster around a value D) The value that appears most often in a sample E) The middle value that separates the higher and lower halves of a data set Answer: A, E, D, C, B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

98) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Range II. Bins III. Maximum IV. Standard deviation V. Outliers A) The intervals into which you want to group your data B) Used to help calculate the range C) The square root of the variance D) Simplest method to calculate the dispersion of a data set E) Values that are abnormally different from the other values in a random sample 249 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: D, A, B, C, E Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Conduct basic statistical analyses in Excel

99) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Standard error II. Standard deviation III. Sample variance IV. Kurtosis V. Skewness A) The most commonly used method for determining the average spread of a data set from the mean B) Characterizes the peakedness or flatness of a distribution compared to the normal distribution C) Used to determine how accurately the sample mean predicts the population mean D) Characterizes the degree of asymmetry of a distribution around its mean E) A measure of how far the data in the sample are spread from the mean Answer: C, A, E, B, D Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Generate descriptive statistics and other analyses using the Analysis ToolPak

100) Match the following terms with their description.

I. R-squared II. Intercept coefficient III. Hypergeometric distribution IV. Poisson distribution V. Exponential distribution A) Provides a more conservative estimate of the independent variables' ability to predict the value of the dependent variable B) A discrete population distribution that calculates the probability of drawing a specific number of target items from a collection without replacement C) Continuous probability function that models the times between events D) Calculates the probability that a specified number of events will occur based on the mean of the data set E) Value at which a regression line will cross the y-axis; used in the slope intercept formula to predict values Answer: A, E, B, D, C Diff: 3 250 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 9. Predict future values based on historical data Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 13: The Excel Data Model and Business Intelligence 1)

refers to a variety of software applications that are used to analyze an organization's data.

A) KPIs B) Dashboards C) Business intelligence D) Power Queries

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

2) One of the primary goals of a dashboard is to stay focused on a specific business problem. This is an example of the design concept.

A) Making Sure It Is Well Defined B) Keeping It Simple C) Knowing Your Users D) Defining Crucial KP Is Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

3) All of the following statements are TRUE about the current business drivers for dashboard initiatives EXCEPT: A) The need to recruit the best employees B) The need to gain visibility into key business processes C) The need for one view of the business data D) The need for improved timeliness and accuracy of business decisions Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

4) One of the primary goals of a dashboard is to help the user navigate and interpret a large quantity of data at a glance. This is an example of the design concept.

A) Making Sure It Is Well Defined 251 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) Keeping It Simple C) Knowing Your Users D) Designing with White Space Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

5)

components typically consist of tables, PivotTables, PivotCharts, conditional formatting, and other features available in Excel.

A) Data model B) KPI C) Dashboard D) Power Query

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

6) You can increase the success of your dashboard by taking personal preferences into account whenever possible. This is an example of the design concept.

A) Making Sure It Is Well Defined B) Designing with White Space C) Knowing Your Users D) Defining Crucial KPIs Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

7) One of the primary goals of a dashboard is to ensure that managers have ways to quantifiably measure the progress toward short-term and long-term goals. This is an example of the design concept.

A) Making Sure It Is Well Defined B) Keeping It Simple C) Knowing Your Users D) Defining Crucial KPIs Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design 252 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

8) If you are a personnel manager, you would most likely use the A) access speed B) cost per lead C) budget ratio D) turnover rates

KPI.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

9) With the appropriate know-how, can be much more flexible in the variety of analytics it can provide in a dashboard than many off-the-shelf solutions.

A) Excel B) SQL Server C) Word D) Access Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

10) If you are a marketing and sales manager, you would most likely use the KPI. A) on-time delivery B) service satisfaction levels C) productivity by channel D) gross yield Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

11) Following the an effective dashboard.

A) KPI B) SDLC C) BI D) white space

model can provide the necessary guidance to creating

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design 253 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

12) Data about a person, place, or event that is stored in multiple tables is called data.

A) relational B) organizational C) Power Query D) imported Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Explore the data model

13) Most organizations store their data in a secure, accurate, and consistent.

A) presentation file B) document C) formatted workbook D) relational database

in order to ensure their data is

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Explore the data model

14) Excel 365 allows for advanced data modeling and analyses on data from multiple sources by leveraging which feature?

A) Slicers B) Sparklines C) Power Pivot D) JavaScript Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

15) Many organizations store data inside a relational database such as My SQ L or Oracle or in a database management system like Microsoft .

A) PowerPoint B) Word C) Excel D) Access Answer: D Diff: 2 254 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

16) Which DAX function allows you to retrieve related data from another table in a Power Pivot model?

A) IF B) RELATED C) RATE D) CONCAT Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

17) Which of the following is NOT a standard category of DAX functions used in Power Pivot?

A) Date and Time B) Information C) Parent/Child D) Geometric Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

18) A(n) field performs a calculation without explicitly creating a new calculated field in Power Pivot.

A) bidirectional KPI B) explicit calculated C) implicit calculated D) vertical multiple Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

19) A(n) field is created when a formula is typed in the Calculation Area of the Power Pivot window.

A) bidirectional KPI B) explicit calculated C) implicit calculated D) vertical multiple 255 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

20) A is a calculated field in Power Pivot that directly resolves to a single scalar value.

A) target value B) status threshold C) vertical multiple D) base value Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

21) A can be the aggregate of 2026 Profit or a monthly sales goal that every employee should meet.

A) target value B) status threshold C) KPI D) base value Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

22) In Excel, the is displayed with a graphic providing a visual indicator of the status of the base value compared to the target value.

A) target value B) status threshold C) KPI D) base value Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

23) A company's profit is an example of a A) positive KPI B) negative KPI

.

256 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) status threshold D) bidirectional KPI Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

24) The number of sick days in a specific time period is an example of a A) positive KPI B) negative KPI C) status threshold D) bidirectional KPI

.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

25) Explicit calculated fields can be extended to become A) target values B) status thresholds C) KPIs D) base values

.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

26) The temperature for storing a particular product where damage could occur if the temperature gets too cold or too hot is an example of a .

A) positive KPI B) negative KPI C) tridirectional KPI D) bidirectional KPI Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

27) If a company is using a previous version of Excel without Power Pivot, they can use Conditional Formatting to indicate proximity to various K PI goals.

A) Highlight Cells Rules 257 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) Data Bars C) Color Scales D) Icon Sets Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

28) Which of the following statements about creating PivotTables and PivotCharts with Power Pivot is NOT true?

A) Power Pivot gives you the same options as a PivotTable except you can use relational data to build it.

B) PivotTables and PivotCharts are a major component in any dashboard.

C) PivotTables and PivotCharts can be created with data from multiple sources without any additional software or add-ins as long as the data is relational data.

D) Having Power Pivot enabled gives you more options than a traditional PivotTable offers.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create PivotTables and PivotCharts with Power Pivot

29) The window has options to create multiple PivotCharts on the same worksheet using data from all connected data sources.

A) PivotTable B) Power View C) Power Pivot D) PivotChart Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create PivotTables and PivotCharts with Power Pivot

30)

are miniature charts that provide a way to graphically summarize a row or column of data in a single cell.

A) PivotCharts B) Sparklines C) KPIs D) Map Charts

Answer: B Diff: 2 258 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 4. Create PivotTables and PivotCharts with Power Pivot

31)

are visual controls that allow you to quickly and easily filter your data in an interactive way.

A) Slicers B) Sparklines C) Hidden objects D) Unnecessary objects

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Create PivotTables and PivotCharts with Power Pivot

32) Which of the following statements about using Map Charts for data visualizations is NOT true?

A) Being able to visualize data through a map visual can lead to many useful insights.

B) The easiest method of organizing data for a Map Chart is to use V BA. C) Updates to Excel through Microsoft 365 have included a variety of new chart types, including the Map Chart.

D) A Map Chart is one of the chart types that cannot be created from PivotTable data.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use Map Charts for data visualizations

33)

are formulas in Excel that can return an array of variable sizes.

A) Slicers B) Dynamic array formulas C) Spilled data D) Dynamic name ranges

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

34) When a dynamic array puts values in the adjacent cells, it is referred to as .

A) Finding B) Valuing 259 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) Spilling D) Filling Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

35) The function returns an array of distinctive values from a data set.

A) UNIQUE B) SORT C) TRANSPOSE D) CALCULATE Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

36) The function returns an array of values in either ascending or descending order.

A) UNIQUE B) SORT C) TRANSPOSE D) CALCULATE Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

37) The function converts a range or array of data from rows to columns or vice versa.

A) UNIQUE B) SORT C) TRANSPOSE D) CALCULATE Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

38) The operator allows for a function to reference a spill range by using the first cell in the range.

260 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) <> B) # C) $ D) = Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

39)

enable(s) external data to be connected and refreshed within a cell in a worksheet.

A) Data Validation B) Data Sets C) The Power BI Desktop D) Data Types

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

40) The role of BI has increased over the last decade because the amount of data being collected by businesses continues to grow at a rapid rate.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

41) Business intelligence refers to a variety of software applications that are used to analyze an organization's data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

42) Digital dashboards are mechanisms that primarily deliver business intelligence in tabular form, with limited visualizations.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

261 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

43) A typical manager engages in a multitude of different tasks and decisions each day.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

44) If users cannot easily interpret your dashboard, then you may have made it too complicated.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

45) The less defined your dashboard theme, the more useful it will be for users.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

46) You can increase the success of your dashboard by taking personal preferences into account whenever possible.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

47) A KPI is a quantifiable measure that helps managers to define progress toward both short-term and long-term goals.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

48) A good dashboard should help to summarize complex data so users can interpret the information at a glance.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

262 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

49) White space is always white and devoid of content.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

50) The systems development life cycle provides a structure for managing complex information technology projects.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

51) A data model is a collection of tables and their relationships that reflect the real-world relationships between business functions and processes.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Explore the data model

52) Power Pivot allows you to create calculated columns and calculated fields and to establish KPIs. Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

53) Many of the DAX functions have the same names and functionality as regular Excel functions.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

54) Calculated fields can be created in any of the cells in the Calculation Area of the Power Pivot window.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot 263 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

55) An explicit calculated field is created when you drag a field like Sales or Quantity Sold into the Values area of a PivotTable.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

56) An implicit calculated field is created automatically when a field is dragged into the Values area of a PivotTable.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

57) When naming calculated fields, avoid names that have already been given to calculated columns within the same workbook.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

58) A base value must always be an absolute value, not another calculated field.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

59) A status threshold is defined by the range between a high value and low value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

60) A bidirectional KPI is defined when performance is evaluated equally for high and low values, such as maintaining an optimal temperature. as a company's profit.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

264 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

61) A positive KPI is defined when higher values always indicate better performance, such as a company‘s profit. direction.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

62) A negative KPI is defined when the greater the value, the worse the K PI, such as the number of sick days in a specific time period.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

63) Sparklines are miniature charts that provide a way to graphically summarize a row or column of data in a single cell.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create PivotTables and PivotCharts with Power Pivot

64) There are three different types of sparklines: line, pie, and win/loss.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create PivotTables and PivotCharts with Power Pivot

65) The easiest method of organizing data for a Map Chart is to use a PivotTable.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use Map Charts for data visualizations

66) Once a dashboard has been designed to meet the business requirements, there are several steps you need to take to get it ready for use.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Prepare a dashboard for production

265 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

67) With dashboards, it is important to ensure that certain protections are in place to avoid accidental deletion of objects.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Prepare a dashboard for production

68) To be able to manipulate slicers and PivotCharts on a protected worksheet, you must allow users to Edit Objects in the Protect Sheet dialog box.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Prepare a dashboard for production

69) You can expand and collapse the ribbon by pressing Alt + F1.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Prepare a dashboard for production

70) The array argument is the range or array of cells from which a function will return unique values.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

71) The Data Types in Excel allow you to connect to external sources such as Wolfram.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

72) Nesting the UNIQUE function inside the SORT function returns an array of distinctive values from a data set ordered in either ascending or descending order.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

266 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

73) The role of has increased over the last decade because the amount of data being collected by businesses continues to grow at a rapid rate.

Answer: business intelligence, B I Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

74) One of the primary goals of a dashboard is to help the user navigate and interpret a large quantity of data at a glance. This is an example of the design concept.

Answer: Keeping It Simple Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

75) A(n) is a quantifiable measure that helps managers define progress toward both short-term and long-term goals.

Answer: key performance indicator, K PI Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

76) A good should help to summarize complex data so users can interpret the information at a glance.

Answer: dashboard Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

77) The provides a structure for managing complex information technology projects.

Answer: systems development life cycle, S DLC Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the basics of dashboard design

78) A(n) is a collection of tables and their relationships that reflect the real-world relationships between business functions and processes.

Answer: data model Diff: 2 267 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 2. Explore the data model

79) A(n) can be the aggregate of a monthly sales goal that every salesperson should meet.

Answer: target value Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

80) A(n) calculated field is created when you drag a field like Sales or Quantity Sold into the Values area of a PivotTable.

Answer: implicit Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

81) A(n) calculated field is created when a formula is typed in the Calculation Area of the Power Pivot window.

Answer: explicit Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

82) A(n) KPI is defined when performance deteriorates as values move too far above or below a target value in either direction.

Answer: bidirectional Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

83) A(n) Answer: base

value is a calculated field that resolves to a value.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

84) A(n) value serves as a benchmark for comparing performance metrics and can be derived from either another calculated field or an absolute value.

Answer: target 268 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

85) A(n) is defined by the range between a high value and low value.

Answer: status threshold Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

86) A(n) is defined when the greater the value, the worse the K PI, such as the number of sick days in a specific time period.

Answer: negative KPI Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

87)

are miniature charts that provide a way to graphically summarize a row or column of data in a single cell.

Answer: Sparklines Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create PivotTables and PivotCharts with Power Pivot

88) The function converts a range or array of data from rows to columns or vice versa.

Answer: TRANSPOSE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

89) Dynamic formulas return an array of values across multiple cells, spilling into adjacent cells.

Answer: array Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

90)

in Excel are connections to online data sources that return related information.

269 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: Data Types Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types

91) Match the following terms with their description.

I. BI II. Digital dashboard III. KPI IV. Data model V. Relational data A) A mechanism that delivers BI in graphical form B) A variety of software applications used to analyze an organization's data C) Collection of tables D) Quantifiable measure tracking progress toward business goals E) Data stored across multiple tables with defined relationships Answer: B, A, D, C, E Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

92) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Explicit calculated field II. Implicit calculated field III. Base value IV. Status threshold V. Target value A) Uses a wide variety of functions beyond general aggregation B) The range between a high and low value C) Created when you drag a field into the Values area of a PivotTable D) Can either be another calculated field that resolves to a value or an absolute value E) A calculated field that resolves to a value Answer: A, C, E, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create advanced data models using Power Pivot

93) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Bidirectional KPI II. Negative KPI III. Positive KPI 270 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

IV. Slicer V. Sparkline A) Defined when the greater the value, the worse the K PI B) Defined when the greater the value, the better the K PI C) Value becomes worse the farther it deviates from the target value in either direction D) Filtering tool E) Miniature chart that displays in a single cell Answer: C, A, B, D, E Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create PivotTables and PivotCharts with Power Pivot

94) Match the following terms with their description.

I. TRANSPOSE II. UNIQUE III. Data Types IV. Spill Range Operator V. Dynamic array formulas A) Returns an array of distinctive values from a data set B) Connections to an online data source that return related information C) Formulas in Excel that can return an array of variable sizes D) Converts a range or array of data from rows to columns or vice versa by rotating the data E) Allows for a function to reference a spill range by using the first cell in the range, followed by # Answer: D, A, B, E, C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Analyze data with dynamic array formulas and data types Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Chapter 14: Visual Basic for Applications—VB A 1)

are visual controls that allow you to quickly and easily filter your data in an interactive way.

A) Events B) Form controls C) Objects D) Slicers

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls 271 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

2) Items that can be placed into an Excel worksheet, providing the functionality to interact with your models are .

A) form controls B) events C) loops D) array Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

3) A is a form control that is linked to a specific cell where the value increases or decreases as the up and down arrows on the control are clicked.

A) scroll bar B) spin button C) menu D) list Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

4) Creating a lookup table and using the linking values to various form controls.

A) IF B) SUBTOTAL C) VLOOKUP D) HLOOKUP

function is a common approach to

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

5) A has a function very similar to the spin button. However, the value of the linked cell is increased or decreased by sliding it to the left or right (or up or down).

A) scroll bar B) spin button C) menu D) label Answer: A Diff: 2 272 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

6) Dynamic in PivotCharts provide clarity by displaying a filtered year and/or month in real time.

A) scroll bars B) spin buttons C) menus D) labels Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

7) Which type of model BEST describes a hierarchical collection of items that can be manipulated when using Visual Basic for Applications?

A) Organizational B) Subject C) Object D) Program Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of V BA

8) Which of the following statements about VBA is NOT true?

A) VBA allows a user to implement a wide variety of enhancements to many Microsoft applications.

B) VBA is considered a very basic form of C++ programming.

C) VBA provides additional tools that can enhance functionality and usability of an Excel application.

D) VBA manipulates objects by using the methods and properties associated with them.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

9) Objects grouped together are called object A) collections B) methods C) parameters

.

273 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) sources Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

10) A(n) is a hierarchical collection of objects, consisting of properties, methods, and events that can be manipulated by using VBA. A) method B) collection C) source D) object model Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

11) In VBA, which of the following is used to access or modify the attributes of an object?

A) Properties B) Methods C) Events D) Collections Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

12) To refer to a particular object using VBA, the objects need to be referred to in their hierarchical structure. For example, to refer to cell A1 in a specific worksheet, the code would be .

A) Application.Workbook(―workbookname.xlsx‖).Sheets("Sheet1").Range("A1") B) Application.Workbook(workbookname.xlsx).Worksheet(Sheet1).Range("A1") C) Application.Worksheet("Sheet1").Range("A1") D) Application.Workbook(workbookname.xlsx).Worksheet(Range("A1")) Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

13)

are defined as attributes of an object that can be referred to or manipulated by using VBA. 274 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

A) Indicators B) Properties C) Modules D) Collections Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

14) Microsoft Excel objects have Excel.

A) monitors B) options C) methods D) references

, which are actions performed within

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

15) Within the Visual Basic Editor, the Project window contains a hierarchical list of all the objects in open workbooks, including macros, modules, and worksheets.

A) Properties B) Explorer C) Code D) Information Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

16) A type of variable that refers to one of the pieces of data provided to a method is called a(n) .

A) parameter B) module C) object D) method Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA 275 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

17) Within the Visual Basic Editor, the window contains a list of all the properties of a selected object, such as name, size, and color.

A) Information B) Explorer C) Code D) Properties Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

18) The is the tool built into Microsoft that is used for creating and editing VBA. A) Visual Basic Conveyor B) Visual Basic Illustrator C) Visual Basic Editor D) Visual Basic Player Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

19) In the Visual Basic Editor, the window is where all the VBA language is typed and where macro data can be viewed and edited.

A) Code B) Properties C) Macro D) Graphic Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

20) The two primary types of procedures that are supported by VBA are Sub procedures and procedures.

A) virtual B) prime C) function D) base Answer: C Diff: 3 276 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

21) In VBA, a container for code is called a A) Sub procedure B) module C) function procedure D) Properties window

.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

22) All of the following are TRUE about VBA procedures EXCEPT: A) Function procedures are often used to create custom functions that can be entered in worksheet cells.

B) You can have zero or hundreds of Sub procedures and functions written within a single module.

C) If a Sub procedure is to run when a workbook opens or a worksheet becomes active, then it is typically stored in the workbook or worksheet object to take advantage of the Procedure menu at the top of the Code window.

D) Sun routine and function are the two types of procedures that are supported by V BA. Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

23) A performs an action on your project or workbook, such as renaming a worksheet or clearing filtered values from PivotTables.

A) Sub procedure B) module C) function procedure D) Properties window Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

24) In VBA, why is syntax important when writing code?

A) It ensures the code is executed without errors.

B) It prevents the Visual Basic Editor from closing unexpectedly.

277 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) It increases the runtime speed of your program.

D) It allows VBA to automatically debug your code.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create custom functions with VBA

25) Which of the following do NOT make VBA code easy to read?

A) Comments B) Line breaks C) Paragraphs D) Indentations Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Improve readability of VBA with formatting and structure

26)

code in VBA is an excellent way of explaining the purpose and the intention of a procedure.

A) Debugging B) Organizing C) Running

D) Commenting Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Improve readability of VBA with formatting and structure

27) A error occurs when code containing improper logic is executed, displaying a description of the error.

A) data port B) debugging C) run-time D) hard drive Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Troubleshoot VBA

28) The A) parameter

allows you to troubleshoot VBA code errors.

278 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) debugger C) message box D) properties box Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Troubleshoot VBA

29)

are used to execute a series of statements multiple times.

A) Data ports B) Variables C) Elements D) Loops

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create and use loops in VBA

30) Which VBA loop structure is most appropriate for iterating through all elements in a collection or array?

A) Do While B) For Each C) Do Until D) For Next Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Create and use loops in VBA

31) The loops through an object collection or an array.

A) Do…While loop B) Do…Until loop C) For loop D) For…Each loop Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create and use loops in VBA

32) The loops until a specified number of loops have been completed.

A) Do…While loop 279 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

B) Do…Until loop C) For loop D) For…Each loop Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create and use loops in VBA

33) VBA can store a value in a(n) , which is the space in a computer's memory that is given a name and is used to store values.

A) container B) variable C) array D) memory unit Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Create and use loops in VBA

34) An example of a(n) opens or closes a workbook.

A) procedure B) variable C) event D) object

at the workbook level would occur when a user

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Assign VBA procedures to events

35) With the VBA control structure, there is virtually no limit to the commands and logic that can be applied.

A) Then B) If-Then-Else C) If-Then-Again D) If-Then-End Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Assign VBA procedures to events

280 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

36) A(n) is an effective way of using VBA code to increase the interactivity of a dashboard by prompting the user for information and storing that information in a variable to be used later.

A) input box B) spinner C) list D) scroll bar Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Protect and secure a workbook

37) It is considered best practice to export any VBA modules as protecting them with a password.

A) Word files B) databases C) text files D) Excel workbooks

before

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Protect and secure a workbook

38) Protecting VBA code with access the code.

A) a password B) encryption C) a form control D) a method

ensures that no unauthorized person will

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Protect and secure a workbook

39) Dashboards provide management with a big-picture view of the business.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

40) Slicers are visual controls that allow you to quickly and easily filter your data in an 281 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

interactive way.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

41) Dashboards are objects that can be placed into an Excel worksheet, providing the functionality to interact with your models.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

42) A message box is a form control that is linked to a specific cell.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

43) Creating a lookup table and using the INDEX function is a common approach to linking values to various form controls.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

44) With a scroll bar, the value of the linked cell is increased or decreased by sliding the scroll bar to the left or right (or up or down).

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

45) Labels are critical to dashboard design and can add clarity to the graphics being displayed.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

282 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

46) Visual Basic for Applications is a powerful programming language that is part of all Microsoft applications.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

47) Object-oriented programming uses a hierarchy of objects as the focus of the programming.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

48) An object model is a hierarchical collection of objects, consisting of properties, methods, and events that can be manipulated by using VBA. Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

49) A particular object can be referenced inside a collection by referring to the object collection and then the name or number that represents that specific member of that collection.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

50) Methods are attributes of an object that can be referred to or manipulated by using V BA. Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

51) A parameter is a special kind of variable used to refer to data provided to a method.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA 283 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

52) The Code window contains a hierarchical list of all the objects in open workbooks, including macros, modules, and worksheets.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

53) The Project Explorer window is where all the VBA code is typed.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

54) The Properties window contains a list of all the properties of a selected object such as name, size, and color.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

55) The two primary types of procedures that are supported by VBA are Sub procedures and event procedures.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

56) A Sub procedure performs an action on your project or workbook, such as renaming a worksheet or clearing filtered values from PivotTables.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

57) A function procedure is a group of VBA statements that performs a calculation and returns a single value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA 284 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

58) It is best to group your Sub procedures together by what they do into separate modules.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

59) To create a function procedure, you must first declare that it is a function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create custom functions with VBA

60) When writing VBA, you need to take extra steps to keep the code legible and to document what steps you are taking and why.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Improve readability of VBA with formatting and structure

61) The VBA Recorder generates code that is always efficient and ready for production use.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Improve readability of VBA with formatting and structure

62) Names for Sub procedures must begin with a letter and cannot contain any spaces.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Improve readability of VBA with formatting and structure

63) Press F3 in the VBE to display the Object Browser, which shows properties, methods, and events for an object.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Improve readability of VBA with formatting and structure

285 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

64) A run-time error occurs when code containing improper logic is executed, displaying a description of the error.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Troubleshoot VBA

65) When using the debugger, the code is executed one line at a time to make it easy to identify the exact point where the run-time error occurs.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Troubleshoot VBA

66) provide management with a big-picture view of the business.

Answer: Dashboards Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

67)

are visual controls that allow you to quickly and easily filter your data in an interactive way.

Answer: Slicers Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

68) Creating a lookup table and using the to linking values to various form controls.

Answer: VLOOKUP

function is a common approach

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

69)

is a powerful programming language that is part of most Microsoft

applications.

Answer: Visual Basic for Applications, VBA Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA 286 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

70)

programming uses a hierarchy of objects, also called classes, as the focus of the programming.

Answer: Object-oriented Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

71) An object model is a(n) collection of objects, consisting of properties, methods, and events that can be manipulated by using VBA. Answer: hierarchical Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

72) A particular object can be identified within its collection by referring to the object and a specific identifier, such as its name or index.

Answer: collection Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

73) A(n) method.

Answer: parameter

is a special kind of variable used to refer to data provided to a

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

74) The window contains a list of all the properties of a selected object such as name, size, and color.

Answer: Properties Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

75) The two primary types of procedures that are supported by VBA are Sub procedures and procedures.

Answer: function Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA 287 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

76) A(n) performs an action on your project or workbook, such as renaming a worksheet or clearing filtered values from PivotTables.

Answer: Sub procedure Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

77) A(n) is a group of VBA statements that performs a calculation and returns a single value.

Answer: function procedure Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

78) Names for Sub procedures must begin with a(n) any spaces.

Answer: letter

and cannot contain

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Improve readability of VBA with formatting and structure

79) A(n) occurs when code containing improper logic is executed, displaying a description of the error.

Answer: run-time error Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Troubleshoot VBA

80) When using the , the code is executed one line at a time to make it easy to identify the exact point where the run-time error occurs.

Answer: debugger Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Troubleshoot VBA

81) A(n) Answer: loop

is used to execute a series of statements multiple times.

Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create and use loops in VBA 288 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

82) A(n) is space in a computer's memory that is given a name and is used to store a value of a specified data type.

Answer: variable Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create and use loops in VBA

83) A message box is a dialog box object that is created by using the command.

Answer: MsgBox Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Assign VBA procedures to events

84) A(n) Answer: event

is an action initiated either by a user or by VBA code.

Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Assign VBA procedures to events

85) The VBA control structure evaluates criteria as true or false and this conditional logic provides extensive flexibility in coding.

Answer: If-Then-Else Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Assign VBA procedures to events

86)

worksheets from intentional or unintentional modification can involve password protection or hiding the worksheets in the Excel workbook.

Answer: Protecting Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Protect and secure a workbook

87) A(n) on a dashboard prompts the user for information, stores it in a variable, and uses it later for interactivity.

Answer: input box Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Protect and secure a workbook 289 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

88) Protecting VBA code with a(n) will access the code.

Answer: password

ensures that no unauthorized person

Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Protect and secure a workbook

89) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Digital dashboard II. Form control III. Slicer IV. Spin button V. Scroll bar A) The value of the linked cell is increased or decreased by sliding it to the left or right (or up or down) B) An object that can be placed into an Excel worksheet, providing the functionality to interact with your models C) A form control that is linked to a specific cell D) Visual control that allows you to quickly and easily filter your data in an interactive way E) A tool that delivers business intelligence in graphical form Answer: E, B, D, C, A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Enhance spreadsheets with form controls

90) Match the following terms with their description.

I. OOP II. VBA III. Object collection IV. Object model V. Object A) Powerful programming language B) How a particular object can be referenced inside a collection C) Can serve as a container for other objects D) Uses a hierarchy of classes E) Consists of a hierarchical collection of objects Answer: D, A, B, E, C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

290 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

91) Match the following terms with their description.

I. ActiveCell II. ActiveWindow III. ActiveSheet IV. ActiveChart V. Selection A) The object selected B) The active chart sheet or chart contained in a ChartObject C) The active cell D) The active window E) The active sheet (worksheet or chart) Answer: C, D, E, B, A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

92) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Properties II. Separators III. Method IV. Code window V. Parameter A) Indicate the distinction between the object container and the member of that container B) An action that an object is able to perform C) A variable used to refer to data provided to a method D) Attributes of an object that can be referred to or manipulated by using VBA E) Where all the VBA code is typed Answer: D, A, B, E, C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

93) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Project Explorer window II. Properties window III. Visual Basic Editor IV. Function procedure V. Code window A) Contains a hierarchical list of all the objects in open workbooks B) A group of VBA statements that performs a calculation and returns a single value C) Used for creating and editing VBA 291 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) Where all the VBA code is typed E) Contains a list of all the properties of a selected object Answer: A, E, C, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the components of VBA

94) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Do...Until loop II. Do...While loop III. For...Each loop IV. For loop V. Loop A) Loops through an object collection or an array B) Loops until a specified condition is true C) Used to execute a series of statements multiple times D) Loops until a specified number of loops have been completed E) Loops while a specified condition is true Answer: B, E, A, D, C Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create and use loops in VBA

95) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Variable II. Event III. Message box IV. Digital Dashboard V. Input box A) Created using the MsgBox command B) Used to increase the interactivity of a dashboard C) Action initiated either by a user or by VBA code D) Space in a computer's memory E) Delivers business intelligence in graphical form Answer: D, C, A, E, B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Assign VBA procedures to events Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Appendix A: Leveraging Microsoft's Power Business Intelligence ("B I") Desktop Suite 292 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

1) Which of the following is FALSE? A) The Power BI suite allows businesses to easily leverage both analytics and intelligence into day-to-day operations.

B) Both content creation and publishing are free in the Power BI suite.

C) The Power BI suite has two specific advantages–content creation is free and the interface is comfortable for Excel users.

D) The Power BI suite is composed of two pieces–the Power BI Desktop and the Power BI service.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

2) Which two pieces make up the Power BI suite?

A) Power BI Desktop and Power BI service B) Power BI Suite and Power BI Add-in C) Power BI Report Builder and Power BI Add-in D) Microsoft Office 365 and Power BI service Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

3) The Power BI is a free tool for analysts to develop powerful visualizations, models, reports, and analytics.

A) suite B) service C) Desktop D) add-in Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

4) Which of the following best describes the Power BI Desktop?

A) A paid tool for viewing and interacting with Power BI reports B) A free tool for analysts to develop visualizations, models, and analytics C) A feature in Microsoft Excel for creating advanced charts and reports D) An online service for sharing Power BI reports with content consumers Answer: B Diff: 2 293 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

5) The Power BI an interactive form.

A) suite B) service C) Desktop D) add-in

is a paid service that allows the analyst to share reports in

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

6) Which of the following is NOT true about the Power BI suite?

A) Sharing files created in the Power BI Desktop as a .pbix file is free but publishing to content consumers is not free.

B) Analysts can develop reports in the Power BI Desktop for free.

C) The Power BI service is made for content consumers.

D) The Power BI suite is composed of three pieces—the Power BI Desktop, the Power BI service, and Microsoft Office 365.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

7) Local connections to your data are called a(n) A) absolute B) relative C) static D) cloud

connection.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

8) In the Power BI Desktop, which view allows users to create additional calculations and view raw data similar to Excel‘s Power Pivot?

A) Table view B) Model view C) Report view D) Visualizations pane 294 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

9) In the Power BI Desktop, which view is the default starting view where visual content is created?

A) Table view B) Model view C) Report view D) Visualizations pane Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

10) Which of the following is NOT a type of visual content in the Power BI Desktop?

A) Maps B) Calculations C) Tables D) Waterfalls Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

11) You need to access a list of available tables in the Power BI Desktop. Where can you find them?

A) Visualizations pane B) Model view C) Table view D) Data pane Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

12) Maps can be created, configured, and formatted in the A) Visualizations pane B) Model view C) Table view

.

295 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) Data pane Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

13) A key uniquely identifies the record and can only occur once.

A) foreign B) visualization C) primary D) transaction Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

14) A key identifies a record in another data set.

A) foreign B) visualization C) primary D) transaction Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

15) The way in which the data in one data set connects to another data set through common fields known as keys is called a .

A) visualization B) connection C) property D) relationship Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

16) The Report view in Power BI is where A) charts and maps B) relationships C) calculated tables

can be created.

296 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) keys Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

17) The Table view in Power BI is very similar to A) data tables in Excel B) the Relationships window in Access C) PivotCharts in Excel D) Power Pivot in Excel

.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

18) A A) Column B) Table C) Map D) Gauge

visualization allows you to represent locational data.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

19) The category of functions that allows you to add a calculation derived from other fields in the database is called .

A) DAX B) OLAP C) Power Query D) Reporting Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

20) The function pulls a value from a field in a different table using the relationships defined in the data model.

A) DAX B) CALCULATE 297 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C) RELATED D) TOTALYTD Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

21) Which of the following is NOT a characteristic of the RELATED function?

A) The RELATED function belongs to the DAX category of functions.

B) The argument in the RELATED function is a reference to another table‘s field.

C) The RELATED function only has one argument.

D) Where the syntax says Column, you give the calculation a name.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

22) A visualization represents hierarchical data in the form of a rectangle with smaller rectangles inside, where the size of the rectangles represents their values.

A) Treemap B) Line C) Map D) Gauge Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

23) Which category of calculations in Power BI allows you to compare time hierarchy in years, quarters, months, and days, for example, comparing quarterly sales this year with the same quarter last year?

A) Treemap visualization B) Time Intelligence C) Calculated Table D) Gauge visualization Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

298 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

24) A is a table created from a function that automatically populates the data in the new table.

A) Treemap visualization B) Map visualization C) Calculated Table D) relationship Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

25) The function creates a new table and populates the Date field automatically based on a given start and end date.

A) CALCULATE B) PREVIOUSYEAR C) CALENDAR D) TOTALYTD Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

26) What is the primary purpose of the CALENDAR function in Power BIv? A) To retrieve a specific date value from another table B) To create a table populated with a range of dates C) To calculate the difference between two dates D) To generate a summary of date-based data Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

27) A calculates a result from an expression and is then available in the Data pane to use in visualizations.

A) relationship B) function C) key D) measure Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures 299 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

28) Which of the following is FALSE? A) A measure is always calculated according to the interactions on a report.

B) Measures can be simple SUM functions to more complex DAX or Time Intelligence functions.

C) Once a measure is calculated, it is in the Visualizations pane.

D) Measures are created in Report view.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

29) The function calculates an expression from the first day of the year to the specified date.

A) CALCULATE B) PREVIOUSYEAR C) CALENDAR D) TOTALYTD Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

30) The TOTALYTD function has arguments.

A) one B) two C) three D) four

required argument(s) and two optional

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

31) By default, the Power BI Desktop uses a A) fiscal B) lunar C) normal D) solar

calendar year.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures 300 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

32) While not the default, the Power BI Desktop can be adapted to use a calendar year.

A) fiscal B) lunar C) normal D) solar Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

33) What is the purpose of the Q&A feature in Power BI Desktop?

A) To automatically generate D AX measures B) To allow users to ask natural language questions about their data C) To create relationships between tables D) To provide suggestions for data connections Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

34)

provide a way for users to filter the data to a smaller subset.

A) Events B) Slicers C) Form controls D) Objects

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

35) When you add a trend, the Power BI Desktop adds a(n) A) exponential B) power C) moving average D) linear

trend line.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

301 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

36) The function evaluates an expression based on the specified filters and has two arguments, Expression and Filter.

A) CALCULATE B) PREVIOUSYEAR C) COUNTIFS D) SUMIFS Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

37)

visualization shows how a current value relates to a minimum, target, and maximum value.

A) Table B) Line C) Map D) Gauge

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

38) The function returns the date of the previous year from the current data being evaluated.

A) COUNTIFS B) CALCULATE C) PREVIOUSYEAR D) SUMIFS Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

39) The Power BI suite is composed of two pieces.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

40) The Power BI service is used for content development and is free to all users.

Answer: FALSE 302 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

41) The Power BI Desktop is for content developers.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

42) Publishing files created in the Power BI Desktop requires a paid subscription.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

43) Power BI Desktop updates are automatically installed from the Microsoft Store.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

44) The first task after installing the Power BI Desktop is to create charts.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

45) Data that will be used is NOT stored in the Power BI Desktop file.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

46) Local data sources that can be connected in the Power BI Desktop file include text files, Excel files, and Access databases.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop 303 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

47) Local connections in the Power BI Desktop are a relative connection.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

48) You can connect to more than one kind of data in the Power BI Desktop.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

49) The Power BI interface has four different views: Report, Table, Visualizations, and Relationships.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

50) By default, the Power BI interface opens in the Table view.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

51) Report view is where visualizations are built.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

52) Report view is where charts and maps can be made.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

53) Visualizations can be many different kinds of connected visual content.

Answer: TRUE 304 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

54) Additional calculations can be created in Table view.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

55) Table view in Power BI Desktop allows you to create visualizations directly from the data tables.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

56) In the Model view, you can see all of the tables and how they are related to one another.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

57) The Model view is very similar to the Data Model in Excel and the Relationships window in Access.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

58) The Visualizations pane is where you can access and see all of the tables and fields available for use.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

59) A relationship is how the data in one data set connects to another data set through common fields known as keys.

305 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

60) A foreign key uniquely identifies the record and can only occur once.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

61) A Map visualization allows you to represent locational data such as country, state, and zip code.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

62) The CALCULATE function retrieves a value from a field in a different table using the relationships defined in the data model.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

63) The RELATED function can only be used with fields in the same table.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

64) The Power BI Desktop allows a user to drill down in Treemaps.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

65) A Treemap visualization represents hierarchical data in the form of a rectangle with smaller rectangles inside, where the size of the rectangles represents the value.

Answer: TRUE 306 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

66) A Treemap could represent a company's total sales where the inside smaller, nested rectangles could represent each salespersons' total sales.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

67) Calculations using the PREVIOUSYEAR function can be used to compare time hierarchy in years, quarters, months, and days.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

68) The CALENDAR function creates a data range in a visualization.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

69) The CALENDAR function creates a Calculated Table, which is a table created from a function that automatically populates the data in the new table.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

70) The CALENDAR function automatically generates dates based on the specified range.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

71) A measure is ALWAYS calculated according to the interactions on a report.

Answer: TRUE 307 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

72) Once calculated, measures are available in the Visualizations pane.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

73) The TOTALYTD function calculates an expression from the first day of the year to the specified date.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

74) A table visualization in Power BI can represent relationships between multiple data sets visually.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

75) The PREVIOUSYEAR function is similar to a COUNTIFS or SUMIFS function in Excel.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

76) The Power BI is a free tool for analysts to develop powerful visualizations, models, reports, and analytics.

Answer: Desktop Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

77) The Power BI enables analysts to publish and share reports with content consumers in an interactive form.

308 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: service Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Install and connect the Power BI Desktop

78) In Power BI, graphs, and maps.

Answer: Report

view is where users create visualizations like charts,

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

79) Examples of Answer: visualizations

include a table, map, line, column, and waterfall.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

80) Answer: Table

view is where you can create additional calculations.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

81)

view is where you can see all of the tables and how they are related to

one another.

Answer: Model Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

82) The pane is where you create, configure, and format objects such as a map.

Answer: Visualizations Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

83) The Answer: Data

pane is where you can access and see objects such as tables.

309 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

84) How the data in one data set connects to another data set through common fields known as keys is called a(n) .

Answer: relationship Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

85) A(n) occur once.

Answer: primary

key field is a field that uniquely identifies the record and can only

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

86) A(n) key field is a field in a data set that stores a value that is the primary key in another data set.

Answer: foreign Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

87) A(n) visualization allows you to represent locational data such as country, state, zip code, or geological coordinates.

Answer: Map Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

88) The function retrieves a value from a field in a different table using the relationships defined in the data model.

Answer: RELATED Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

89) A(n)

visualization represents hierarchical data in the form of a 310 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

rectangle with smaller rectangles inside.

Answer: Treemap Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

90) Power BI uses Time calculations to compare values across years, quarters, months, and days in a time hierarchy.

Answer: Intelligence Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

91) The function creates a new table with one field named Date and populates the field with dates automatically based on a given start and end date.

Answer: CALENDAR Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

92) The CALENDAR function automatically creates a(n) Answer: Calculated

Table.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

93) A(n) in the Power BI Desktop calculates a result from an expression that is always calculated according to the interactions on a report.

Answer: measure Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

94) The function calculates an expression from the first day of the year to a specified date.

Answer: TOTALYTD Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Understand calendar tables and date measures

311 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

95) A(n) visualization shows how a current value relates to a minimum, target, and maximum value.

Answer: Gauge Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

96) The function evaluates an expression based on the specified filters and is similar to the COUNTIFS or SUMIFS functions in Excel.

Answer: CALCULATE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

97) The function returns the date of the previous year from the current data being evaluated.

Answer: PREVIOUSYEAR Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

98) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Table view II. Report view III. Model view IV. Visualizations pane V. Data pane A) Where you can access and see all of the tables B) Where you create, configure, and format objects such as a map C) Where you build visualizations D) Where you can see all of the tables and how they are related to one another E) Where you can create additional calculations and see the data Answer: E, C, D, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Understand the Power BI Desktop, relationships, and filled maps

99) Match the following functions with their description.

I. CALCULATE II. CALENDAR III. TOTALYTD 312 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

IV. PREVIOUSYEAR V. RELATED A) Pulls a value from a field in a different table using the relationships defined in the data model B) Returns the date of the previous year from the current data being evaluated C) Evaluates an expression based on the specified filters D) Creates a new table with one field named Date E) Calculates an expression from the first day of the year to the specified date Answer: C, D, E, B, A Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Work with calculations, Treemaps, and drill downs

100) Match the following terms with their description.

I. Treemap visualization II. Gauge visualization III. Map visualization IV. Measure V. Visualization A) Different kinds of connected visual content B) Calculates a result from an expression and becomes available in the Data pane C) Represents hierarchical data in the form of rectangles D) Representation of locational data E) Shows how a current value relates to a minimum, target, and maximum value Answer: C, E, D, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Visualize trends with gauges, forecasting, and slicers

Your Office: Microsoft 365® Excel (Kinser) Common Features 1) Microsoft Word can be used to create all of the following EXCEPT A) presentations B) reports C) letters D) resumes Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the Office suite and applications

313 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

2) Microsoft A) Publisher B) OneNote C) Teams D) Outlook

is an e‐mail, contact, and information management program.

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the Office suite and applications

3) Microsoft A) Excel B) Word C) Teams D) Publisher

is a platform for collaboration.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the Office suite and applications

4) Which of the following is TRUE about using Microsoft 365 on a Mac? A) Virtualization programs provide perfectly identical functionality to Windows versions.

B) Bootcamp allows running both Windows and macOS simultaneously without having to reboot the computer.

C) Virtualization can have minor differences compared to native Windows versions.

D) Only web-based versions of Office can be used on a Mac. Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the Office suite and applications

5) Each Office application has its own specific A) relational database B) Microsoft account C) File Explorer D) application Start screen

.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon 314 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

6) When creating a new, blank Word document, the insertion point will display of the document.

A) on the second to last page B) at the beginning C) in the footer D) in the header Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

7) The is the row of tabs across the top of an Office application window.

A) group B) ribbon C) Quick Access Toolbar D) shortcut menu Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

8) When you click the button in an Office application, you hide a window so it is visible only on the taskbar.

A) Close B) Restore Down C) Maximize D) Minimize Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

9) When you click the button in an Office application, you exit the program if no other files are open for that program.

A) Close B) Restore Down C) Maximize D) Minimize Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon 315 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

10) On the ribbon, a(n) A) area B) toolbar C) section D) group

contains logical pairings of related commands.

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

11) The ribbon for each Office application has the A) File and Home B) Home and View C) View and Insert D) File and Review

tabs in common.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

12) Microsoft Office A) 365 B) Account C) Backstage D) Background

view provides access to the file‐level commands.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

13) The default theme in Microsoft 365 is A) a grayscale theme B) a black theme C) a colorful theme D) a subtle theme

.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

14) The

area in Backstage view allows you to add properties, as well as 316 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

protect, inspect, and manage a document.

A) Account B) Info C) Options D) Share Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

15) An Office A) 365 B) Account C) Backstage D) Background

is an artistic design in the upper‐right area of the title bar.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

16) Which of the following automatically syncs files between devices when changes are made?

A) USB drive B) OneDrive C) Local hard drive D) System memory Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

17) What is the file extension for a Microsoft Excel file created in Microsoft 365?

A) .xls x B) .docx C) .pptx D) ..csv Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

317 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

18) C:\Users\username\OneDrive is an example of a(n) A) AutoRecovery in progress B) ScreenTip C) file extension D) file path

.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

19) f a file is in , the file contents can be seen and read, but you cannot edit, save, or print the contents until you enable editing.

A) Protected View B) Outline view C) Reading Mode D) Draft view Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

20) An Excel file is called a A) workbook B) document C) presentation D) database

.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

21) In Excel, a A) relationship B) join C) cell D) square

is where a row and column intersect.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

318 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

22) Which feature in Office 365 automatically preserves your work in case of an unexpected shutdown?

A) AutoSave B) AutoRecovery C) OneDrive sync D) Manual backup Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

23) The keyboard shortcut for undoing an action is Ctrl + A) Z B) Home C) X D) A

.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

24) The keyboard shortcut for moving to the beginning of a document is Ctrl + .

A) Z B) Home C) H D) B Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

25) Ribbon Display Options allows the A) Backstage B) Custom C) Mini D) Quick Access

Toolbar to be hidden.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon 319 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

26) A(n) provides additional, precise options for formatting or commands, and is accessed by clicking the diagonal arrow in a ribbon group.

A) formatting window B) dialog box C) gallery D) application Start screen Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

27) The is the way the letters in words look, including the size, weight, and style.

A) gallery B) paragraph spacing C) font D) line spacing Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

28) What is the purpose of the small diagonal arrow in the bottom-right corner of ribbon groups?

A) To open a dialog box with additional options B) To minimize the ribbon C) To access the Quick Access Toolbar D) To show keyboard shortcuts Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

29)

lets you see the effects of menu selections on your document file or selected item before making a commitment to a particular choice.

A) The toggle button B) Print Preview C) Live Preview D) Change manager

Answer: C Diff: 2 320 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

30) Which feature in Microsoft 365 allows you to find commands and directly execute actions without navigating through menus or ribbons?

A) The Search box in the title bar B) The Help menu C) The Quick Access Toolbar D) The ribbon tabs Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

31) Which statements best describe the purpose of contextual tabs?

A) They help reduce workspace clutter by appearing only when needed.

B) They remain visible at all times, regardless of the selected object.

C) They provide commands related to a selected object for editing and formatting.

D) Both A and C. Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Format using various Office methods

32) The list of commands related to a selection that appears when you right‐click is the .

A) shortcut menu B) Quick Access Toolbar C) Mini toolbar D) Live Preview Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Format using various Office methods

33) The easiest way to access Help in some programs is by pressing A) F11 B) F6 C) F1 D) F12 Answer: C 321 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Find Help, print, and share in Office

34) Pointing to any command on the ribbon displays a information about the command.

A) Shortcut Guide B) ScreenTip C) Format Painter D) Help window

, which gives more

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Find Help, print, and share in Office

35) A(n) file maintains most formatting attributes of a file, regardless of the type of computer on which the file is open.

A) PDF B) DOCX C) XLS X D) PPTX Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Find Help, print, and share in Office

36)

enhances the functionality of Microsoft Office by adding specialized tools or features.

A) Bootcamp B) A file extension C) A bullet D) An add‐in

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Insert Office add‐ins

37) Add‐ins for Office can be downloaded from A) Google Play B) Microsoftʹs Office Store C) Appleʹs App Store

.

322 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

D) OneDrive Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Insert Office add‐ins

38) Microsoft designed its Office applications to create the same level of familiarity and comfort with its ribbons, features, and functions.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Understand the Office suite and applications

39) Microsoft Access uses a two‐dimensional grid to model quantitative data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the Office suite and applications

40) Microsoft Excel is a program that uses a two‐dimensional grid.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the Office suite and applications

41) The Mac software that allows the user to select which operating system to run is called Bootcamp.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Understand the Office suite and applications

42) Each Office application has a unique application Start screen that provides access to templates and recent files.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

43) The ribbon is the row of tabs located across the top of the application window.

323 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

44) The File tab and Home tab are included in all Office applications.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

45) Office Theme and color scheme are synonymous.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

46) Office Background allows you to work with file‐level commands.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

47) The Office Background can be viewed under Account in Office Backstage.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

48) The best theme for accessibility for people with vision impairments or color blindness is the Colorful theme.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

49) OneDrive is a small, portable external storage device.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 324 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

50) Cloud computing can refer to either hardware or software.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

51) The file extension indicates where the file is stored.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

52) The file extension for an Access database is .xlsx.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

53) File names can consist of letters, numbers, and special characters including ? / | < >.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

54) The Quick Access Toolbar can be customized to include frequently used commands for easier access.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

55) The Undo and Redo buttons are located on the Mini toolbar.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

325 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

56) An active cell can only be found in a Word table.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Format using various Office methods

57) A contextual tab appears to the right of the standard ribbon tabs when the relevant object, such as an image, is selected.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Format using various Office methods

58) Office Help can increase a userʹs proficiency and save you time from seeking outside assistance.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Find Help, print, and share in Office

59) A plug‐in can be used to help enhance the features of Office.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Insert Office add‐ins

60) The row of tabs across the top of the application window is the Answer: ribbon

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

61) Subdivided areas on the ribbon are called Answer: groups

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

62) Office provides access to the file‐level commands, such as saving a file, as well as program options and account settings.

326 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: Backstage Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

63) The color scheme and visual experience in Office is called the Office Answer: Theme

.

Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

64) The theme is the best theme for accessibility for people with vision impairments or color blindness.

Answer: White Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

65) The artistic design in the upper‐right area of the title bar is the Office Answer: Background Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

66) OneDrive and Google Drive are examples of Answer: cloud storage

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

67) Microsoftʹs cloud storage solution is Answer: OneDrive

.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

68) The few letters that come after the period in a file name is called the file .

Answer: extension 327 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

69) The file extension for a Microsoft PowerPoint 365 presentation is Answer: .pptx

.

Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

70) When you save a file to a location on your local machine, it exists at a file .

Answer: path Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

71) The tab in Office provides access to file management tasks like saving, printing, and opening files.

Answer: File Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

72) The list of files that shows your most recently opened or modified documents in Office is called the documents list.

Answer: recent Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

73) When a document is in View, the file contents can be read, but you cannot edit, save, or print the contents until you enable editing.

Answer: Protected Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

74) The control in Word allows zooming from 10% to 400%.

Answer: Zoom, Zoom slider 328 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

75) Keyboard Answer: shortcuts

are the keyboard equivalents of software commands.

Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

76) Pressing the key activates KeyTips, which display keyboard shortcuts for commands on the ribbon and Quick Access Toolbar.

Answer: Alt Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

77) In Excel, clicking the diagonal arrow in the corner of a ribbon group opens a(n) , which provides additional options for precise formatting and commands.

Answer: dialog box Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

78) A smaller window that often appears to the side of the program window and offers options or helps you to navigate through completing a task or feature is a(n) .

Answer: pane Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

79) Times New Roman is an example of a(n) Answer: font

.

Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

80) A(n)

button is used to turn features on and off.

329 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Answer: toggle Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

81) You can experiment with settings before making a final choice when using .

Answer: Live Preview Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

82) The Format selections.

Answer: Painter

allows you to copy a format and apply it to other

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Format using various Office methods

83) Office Answer: Help

can be opened by pressing F1.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Find Help, print, and share in Office

84) A file type commonly used for printing and sharing documents, while preserving most formatting attributes of a source document is .

Answer: PDF, portable document format Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Find Help, print, and share in Office

85) Match the following Microsoft Office programs with their definition.

I. OneNote II. Outlook III. Access IV. Publisher V. Teams A. A desktop publishing program B. A planner and note‐taking program 330 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C. A platform for collaboration D. A relational database program E. An e‐mail, contact, and information management program Answer: B, E, D, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Understand the Office suite and applications

86) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Application Start screen II. Ribbon III. Group IV. Touch/Mouse Mode V. Office Backstage A. The row of tabs across the top of the application window B. Subdivided areas on the ribbon C. Individualized for each Office program D. Provides access to the file‐level commands E. Buttons and commands are larger and more spaced out Answer: C, A, B, E, D Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

87) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Office Theme II. Office Background III. AutoRecover IV. OneDrive V. USB drive A. Overall color scheme and visual experience of Office B. A small, portable storage device C. Attempts to recover any changes made to a document since your last save if something goes wrong D. Microsoftʹs cloud storage solution E. An artistic design in the upper‐right area of the title bar Answer: A, E, C, D, B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

331 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

88) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. File extension II. File path III. Roaming settings IV. Recent documents list V. Protected View A. The physical location of the file B. Offers easy remotely synced user‐specific data C. Read‐only format D. A few letters that come after the period in the file name E. Displays the most recently accessed files Answer: D, A, B, E, C Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

89) Match the following keyboard shortcuts with their action.

I. Ctrl + C II. Ctrl + V III. Ctrl + A IV. Ctrl + Z V. Ctrl + B A. Paste a copied or cut item B. Bold selected text C. Select all the items in a document, all the contiguous cells that contain data in a worksheet, or window D. Undo an action E. Copy the selected item Answer: E, A, C, D, B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Start, save, and manipulate Office applications and use the Office ribbon

90) Match the following terms with their definition.

I. Font II. Toggle button III. Gallery IV. Dialog Box Launcher V. Live Preview A. The way the letters in words look B. A diagonal arrow in the bottom‐right corner of a group on the ribbon that opens advanced options and commands 332 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

C. A set of menu options that appears when you click the arrow next to a button D. Displays an effect of a menu selection before the setting is applied E. One click turns the feature on and a second click turns the feature off Answer: A, E, C, B, D Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Manipulate, correct, and format content in Excel

333 Copyright © 2026, 2023, 2020 Pearson Education, Inc. All Rights Reserved.